Two hundred and six verses. It is widely reported that it came down in the Meccan period; some of its verses (particularly 163-171) are also said to have come down in Medina — I adopt no firm preference. It is the second longest sūra in the Qurʾān: by number of verses it comes after al-Baqara and al-Shuʿarāʾ, but in volume of words it is second only to al-Baqara. The verses of al-Shuʿarāʾ were short (al-Shuʿarāʾ); those of al-Aʿrāf are long.
وَعَلَى ٱلْأَعْرَافِ رِجَالٌ يَعْرِفُونَ كُلًّۢا بِسِيمَىٰهُمْ Wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum (46)
ٱلْأَعْرَاف — al-aʿrāf, from the root ع-ر-ف, the plural of ʿurf. The concrete sense of the root is height and ridge: the ʿurf of a horse is the ridge of the neck where the mane ends, the ʿurf of a cockerel is its comb. From this comes the sense "a raised place, a ridge, a height". The same root also carries the sense "to know, to recognise" (maʿrifa) — and that these two senses stand side by side in a single verse (ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum) is the first thing to record about the name of the sūra. This passage will be treated in detail at verses 46-49, and because both what the word denotes and who those upon it are remain disputed, no preference will be imposed.
A note on naming: in the Qurʾān the names of sūras are most often not a summary of the subject but a distinctive word that occurs in the sūra — this was recorded in al-Shuʿarāʾ. Al-Aʿrāf is the same: a name taken from a scene of four verses is set at the head of a sūra of two hundred and six.
| Block | Verses | Subject | What closes the block |
|---|---|---|---|
| I | 1-10 | The Book, the towns destroyed, the questioning and the weighing | Qalīlan mā tashkurūn (10) |
| II | 11-25 | Adam (Ādam) and Iblīs — the fullest account in the Qurʾān | Wa minhā tukhrajūn (25) |
| III | 26-36 | Four addresses of yā banī Ādam: clothing, temptation, adornment, messengers | Hum fīhā khālidūn (36) |
| IV | 37-53 | The two sides meet: the people of the Fire, the people of the Garden, the people of al-Aʿrāf | Ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn (53) |
| V | 54-58 | Creation, supplication and the likeness of the two soils | Li-qawmin yashkurūn (58) |
| VI | 59-102 | The sequence of prophets: Noah (Nūḥ), Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot (Lūṭ), Shuʿayb + the law of destruction | Wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn (102) |
| VII | 103-171 | The Moses (Mūsā) block — the longest section of the sūra (69 verses) | Laʿallakum tattaqūn (171) |
| VIII | 172-186 | The covenant of alast, the man who slipped out of the signs, dharaʾnā li-jahannam, the names | Fī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn (186) |
| IX | 187-206 | The Hour, the single soul, the helplessness of those called upon, commands to the messenger, the prostration | Wa lahū yasjudūn (206) — a verse of prostration |
From beginning to end the sūra works on a single question: what does man do with the knowledge given to him? And it asks that question from three different places.
| From where | Which verses | What it states |
|---|---|---|
| From the beginning | 11-25, 172-174 | Man was given a knowledge and a word at the very outset |
| From history | 59-171 | The messengers came; each time the same two attitudes appeared |
| From the present | 26-36, 175-206 | The same two attitudes are being lived right now |
And the three cornerstones of the sūra — 11-25 (Adam), 172-174 (alast), 175-177 (the man who slipped out of the signs) — are three moments of the same matter:
| Verse | What was given | What happened |
|---|---|---|
| 7/19-22 | A prohibition and a warning | The prohibition was broken; then it was confessed (23) |
| 7/172 | A testimony | The testimony was taken; then it was forgotten |
| 7/175-176 | Signs | The signs were slipped off and cast away like a worn skin |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verbs of the three sections themselves: nahā (he forbade), ashhada (he called to witness), ātaynāhu āyātinā (We gave him Our signs). In all three there is first a giving, and then the passing of what was given out of the hand. What is commanded at the end of the sūra is exactly the reverse of this: wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika (205) — to hold, to keep in hand.
The word repeated through the sequence of prophets in this sūra is al-malaʾ, and it takes the place held in al-Shuʿarāʾ by the seal kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn.
| Prophet | Verse where malaʾ occurs | How it is qualified |
|---|---|---|
| Noah | 60 | al-malaʾu min qawmih — without qualifier |
| Hūd | 66 | al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih |
| Ṣāliḥ | 75 | al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmih |
| Shuʿayb | 88 | al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmih |
| Shuʿayb (a second time) | 90 | al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih |
| Moses / Pharaoh | 103, 109, 127 | Firʿawna wa malaʾih |
And malaʾ does not occur in the story of Lot (80-84) — there the addressee is directly qawmuh. This is a countable datum.
The root م-ل-أ: to fill. Malaʾ means "those who fill an assembly", that is, the body that holds the word and takes the decisions. The idea of "filling" in the root was also treated in al-Mulk and Ṣād in the pattern la-amlaʾanna jahannama; I rely on that treatment.
I record this as an observation: in the sequence of prophets in al-Aʿrāf the opposing side is never "the people" but the deciding body within the people. And in verse 75 that body is set against alladhīna'stuḍʿifū (those made weak) — the sūra presents the opposition along a line of class.
| Repetition | Where it occurs | How many |
|---|---|---|
| Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh | 59 (Noah), 65 (Hūd), 73 (Ṣāliḥ), 85 (Shuʿayb) | 4 |
| Yā banī Ādam | 26, 27, 31, 35 | 4 |
| Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn | 78 (Thamūd), 91 (Madyan) | 2 |
| The pattern Lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn | 35, 49 | 2 |
| Alladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā | 36, 40, 64, 72, 92 (as a verb), 136, 146, 147, 177, 182 | many |
| Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | 56, 85 | 2 |
| Wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā | 45, 86 | 2 |
| Ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn | 159 (of the people of Moses), 181 (of those We created) | 2 |
| Sīmā | 46, 48 | 2 |
| Announcements of destruction of the type Fa-kullan akhadhnā bi-dhanbih | 64, 72, 78, 84, 91, 96, 136 | 7 |
One — wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā (56) and wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā (85) are the same sentence. The first is said directly to the reader, the second in the mouth of Shuʿayb to Madyan. That is, the sūra puts its own command into the mouth of a prophet. In Hūd Table 4 it was tabulated that Sūrat Hūd does the same thing (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh → the third verse of the sūra and the mouths of three prophets). I rely on that treatment; al-Aʿrāf applies the same technique once.
Two — the sentence ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn occurs twice word for word (159 and 181). The first is about the people of Moses, the second about all created beings. I record this as an observation: the sūra shows that it issues no blanket judgement about a community by widening its own sentence. The rule of the method that "no blanket judgement is issued" (Method) finds support here from within the text itself.
The dominant verse-ending of the sūra is ‑ūn / ‑īn (tashkurūn, yadhdhakkarūn, yaʿlamūn, muʾminīn, khālidīn). But the verse-ending of al-Aʿrāf is not single-toned as that of al-Shuʿarāʾ is: among the long verses, closings such as al-ghāfirīn (155), al-rāḥimīn (151), ḥakīm are scattered. The sūra takes its length from the length of its sentences; its sound pattern loosens accordingly. This is a record of fact; no reckoning of letters or numbers is entered into (al-Baqara).
It is widely reported that the sūra came down in the last years of Mecca. The addressees appear in three rings:
| Ring | Where | What is said |
|---|---|---|
| The notables of Mecca | 2-10, 175-206 | Follow the Book, not the forefathers; the weighing is real |
| The peoples of the past | 59-102 | The same call, the same body, the same end |
| The community given a Book | 103-171 | What was done with the Book given |
And the last section of the sūra (172-206) draws the three rings together at a single point: the scene of alast looks to all mankind, the example of insilākh to the man given a Book, the command khudhi'l-ʿafw to the messenger himself.
الٓمٓصٓ
This is one of the two disconnected-letter sequences in the Qurʾān made up of four letters (the other being al-Mr — al-Raʿd 13/1). And the sequence al-Mṣ occurs only here in the Qurʾān.
The record concerning the disconnected letters was set down in al-Baqara at 2/1 and in Ṭāhā at 20/1: what the letters mean is not known with certainty; explanations are transmitted, none of them carrying certainty. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. Claims resting on the reckoning of letters and numbers are not used in this commentary (Method).
| Sūra | Sequence | What comes after it |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/1-2 | Alif-Lām-Mīm | Dhālika'l-kitāb |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/1-2 | Alif-Lām-Mīm-Ṣād | Kitābun unzila ilayk |
| Yūnus 10/1 | Alif-Lām-Rā | Tilka āyātu'l-kitābi'l-ḥakīm |
| Hūd 11/1 | Alif-Lām-Rā | Kitābun uḥkimat āyātuh (Hūd) |
| al-Raʿd 13/1 | Alif-Lām-Mīm-Rā | Tilka āyātu'l-kitāb |
In all five of these sūras the "Book" is named immediately after the disconnected letters. This is a verifiable pattern; I make no claim about what it means.
كِتَٰبٌ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكَ فَلَا يَكُن فِى صَدْرِكَ حَرَجٌ مِّنْهُ لِتُنذِرَ بِهِۦ وَذِكْرَىٰ لِلْمُؤْمِنِينَ · ٱتَّبِعُوا۟ مَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكُم مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ مِن دُونِهِۦٓ أَوْلِيَآءَ قَلِيلًا مَّا تَذَكَّرُونَ
Kitābun unzila ilayka fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minhu li-tundhira bihī wa dhikrā li'l-muʾminīn · Ittabiʿū mā unzila ilaykum min rabbikum wa lā tattabiʿū min dūnihī awliyāʾ, qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn
"It is a Book sent down to you — let there be no constriction in your breast on account of it — that you may warn by it, and as a reminder to the believers. · Follow what has been sent down to you from your Lord; do not follow other guardians beside Him. How little you take to heart!"
The concrete sense of the root: tightness, a narrow place. The lexicographers describe ḥaraj as "a place where the trees are so tangled together that one cannot get in". From this comes the sense of narrowness, distress, the tightening of the breast.
The root occurs in the sūra al-Anʿām and at 22/78 in al-Ḥajj (wa mā jaʿala ʿalaykum fi'd-dīni min ḥaraj); the use in al-Aʿrāf is different, and the difference should be recorded: there ḥaraj is a weight not laid upon the one addressed by the religion, here it is the constriction in the breast of the messenger.
That is, "it is a Book sent down to you, that you may warn by it." But a sentence comes in between the two parts: fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minh.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the sentence: before the purpose of the Book's descent is stated, a note is entered about the inner state of the messenger. Before the task of warning is assigned, the distress that task will cause is named.
And this finds its answer at the end of the sūra: khudhi'l-ʿafwa wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfi wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn (199) — there too the messenger is told what to do in the face of the addressee's response. The sūra opens by telling the messenger "do not be distressed" and closes by telling him "turn away".
A comparison: in al-Shuʿarāʾ at 26/3 the same place was held by laʿallaka bākhiʿun nafsaka allā yakūnū muʾminīn — there the messenger's grief was described with the words destroying himself. The same sentence was also treated in al-Kahf at 18/6. Three sūras look at the same state of the messenger with three different words:
| Sūra | Word | What it states |
|---|---|---|
| al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/3 · al-Kahf 18/6 | Bākhiʿun nafsak | Do not grieve to the point of wearing yourself away |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/2 | Ḥaraj fī'ṣ-ṣadr | A constriction of the breast |
| al-Ḥijr 15/97 | Yaḍīqu ṣadruk | The narrowing of the breast |
The third verse builds the whole matter of the sūra out of two verbs: ittabiʿū and lā tattabiʿū. The same root (ت-ب-ع), one an imperative and one a prohibition.
And the object of the prohibition should be recorded: awliyāʾ — "guardians", in the plural. The verse does not say "do not follow other gods"; it says "do not follow guardians".
The root و-ل-ي: nearness, adjacency. Walī — the one who is near, who takes charge of another's affair. The root was treated in al-Jāthiya and in al-Baqara at 2/257 (Allāhu waliyyu'lladhīna āmanū); I rely on that treatment.
I record this as an observation: the choice of the word overlaps with two later sentences of the sūra — innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn (27) and innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāh (30). That is, the prohibition of the third verse receives its ground in the twenty-seventh and thirtieth verses. This is a link that can be verified within the sūra.
وَكَم مِّن قَرْيَةٍ أَهْلَكْنَٰهَا فَجَآءَهَا بَأْسُنَا بَيَٰتًا أَوْ هُمْ قَآئِلُونَ · فَمَا كَانَ دَعْوَىٰهُمْ إِذْ جَآءَهُم بَأْسُنَآ إِلَّآ أَن قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّا كُنَّا ظَٰلِمِينَ
Wa kam min qaryatin ahlaknāhā fa-jāʾahā baʾsunā bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn · Fa-mā kāna daʿwāhum idh jāʾahum baʾsunā illā an qālū innā kunnā ẓālimīn
"How many a town We destroyed; Our violence came upon them by night, or while they slept at noon. · When Our violence came upon them, they had nothing to say but, "We were indeed wrongdoers.""
| Word | Root | Time |
|---|---|---|
| Bayātan | ب-ي-ت — to pass the night | The sleep of night |
| Qāʾilūn | ق-ي-ل — qaylūla | Sleep in the middle of the day (the noon rest) |
The root ق-ي-ل: qaylūla, the short sleep taken at midday in hot regions. The word occurs also at 25/24 in al-Furqān (wa aḥsanu maqīlā) — there it is the resting place of the people of the Garden. I rely on al-Furqān.
I record this as an observation: by naming two times of sleep the verse covers the two ends of the day — and both are moments of defencelessness. The same pair will be repeated in verses 97-98 of this sūra (baʾsunā bayātan wa hum nāʾimūn / baʾsunā ḍuḥan wa hum yalʿabūn). But there the second time will not be sleep but play. The comparison of the two places will be given at 97-98.
A point of word order: the sentence is built as fa-mā kāna daʿwāhum … illā an qālū — a qaṣr (restriction, ḥaṣr) construction: "their claim was nothing but this".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the word: daʿwā means a person's defence, his assertion of a right. And the verse says that when the violence came, the content of the defence was "we were wrongdoers". That is, the defence becomes a confession.
And the sentence innā kunnā ẓālimīn is in the past tense: "we were wrongdoers". The admission is a diagnosis turned towards the past; it is not a sentence of repentance. This distinction becomes visible when it is compared with verse 23 of the same sūra (rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā — there a request for forgiveness follows it). This comparison will be completed at 7/23.
فَلَنَسْـَٔلَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ أُرْسِلَ إِلَيْهِمْ وَلَنَسْـَٔلَنَّ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ · فَلَنَقُصَّنَّ عَلَيْهِم بِعِلْمٍ وَمَا كُنَّا غَآئِبِينَ
Fa-la-nasʾalanna'lladhīna ursila ilayhim wa la-nasʾalanna'l-mursalīn · Fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin wa mā kunnā ghāʾibīn
"We shall certainly question those to whom messengers were sent, and We shall certainly question the messengers. · We shall certainly recount to them with knowledge; for We were never absent."
The structure of the verse must be recorded: the same verb (la-nasʾalanna) is repeated twice, with two different objects.
| Who | Expression |
|---|---|
| The addressees | Alladhīna ursila ilayhim — those to whom it was sent |
| The messengers | Al-mursalīn — those who were sent |
I record this as an observation: that the questioning takes in the messengers as well stands beside the question put to Jesus (ʿĪsā) in the sūra al-Māʾida (5/116) and beside the line of al-Shuʿarāʾ that "your task is delivery". But here there is no accusation; the verb is only suʾāl, questioning.
And the twofold repetition of la-nasʾalanna is not the same as lining up two objects in a single sentence. It does not say "We shall question both these and those"; the verb is built afresh for each of them. This is an emphasis that can be read off the word order.
The construction of the sentence must be recorded: a negated nominal sentence. It does not say "We were present"; it says "We were not absent".
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the word ghayb is generally used in the Qurʾān for the region man cannot reach (al-Baqara 2/3, al-Jinn 72/26). Here the same root is used, negated, of God: man has a ghayb; He has none. And the expression fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin looks to the same place: the recounting is grounded not on witnessing but on knowledge.
وَٱلْوَزْنُ يَوْمَئِذٍ ٱلْحَقُّ فَمَن ثَقُلَتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ · وَمَنْ خَفَّتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ خَسِرُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُم بِمَا كَانُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا يَظْلِمُونَ
Wa'l-waznu yawmaʾidhini'l-ḥaqqu fa-man thaqulat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn · Wa man khaffat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum bimā kānū bi-āyātinā yaẓlimūn
"The weighing on that day is the truth. Whoever's scales are heavy, those are the ones who prosper. · And whoever's scales are light, those are the ones who have lost themselves, because they used to wrong Our signs."
These two verses are identical in structure with 101/6-9 in al-Qāriʿa and 23/102-103 in al-Muʾminūn (fa-ammā man thaqulat mawāzīnuh… wa ammā man khaffat mawāzīnuh). The root was further treated at 21/47 in al-Anbiyāʾ (al-mawāzīna'l-qisṭ) and at 42/17 in al-Shūrā (wa anzala … al-mīzān). I rely on those treatments and do not undo the root و-ز-ن again here.
| Place | Sentence | The name of the outcome |
|---|---|---|
| al-Qāriʿa 101/6-9 | Fa-huwa fī ʿīshatin rāḍiya / fa-ummuhū hāwiya | Place — where he will go |
| al-Muʾminūn 23/102-103 | Fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn / khālidūn | Duration — permanence |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/8-9 | Humu'l-mufliḥūn / khasirū anfusahum | Loss — what he has lost |
The word al-Aʿrāf adds is khasirū anfusahum: "they have lost themselves". What answers to the measure is neither a place nor a duration, but the person himself.
The sentence is a nominal sentence and its predicate is definite (al-ḥaqq). In Arabic a definite predicate states restriction: "the weighing on that day — that is the truth."
| Reading | What al-ḥaqq is | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The predicate | "The weighing on that day is the truth" — it will take place |
| 2 | An attribute of wazn / "justice" as predicate of the subject | "On that day there is a true weighing" — a measure without shortfall |
In Arabic ẓalama is most often directly transitive (ẓalamnā anfusanā, 7/23). Its coming with bi- gives the sense "to do wrong in the matter of something, not to put a thing in its proper place".
The concrete sense of the root ظ-ل-م is "to put a thing somewhere other than its own place"; the root was treated at 31/13 in Luqmān (inna'sh-shirka la-ẓulmun ʿaẓīm). I rely on that treatment.
I record this as my own reading: the sentence does not say "they denied Our signs"; it says "they did wrong in the matter of Our signs" — that is, they put the sign somewhere other than where it stood. And precisely this verb will be used of Pharaoh and his people in verse 103 of this sūra: fa-ẓalamū bihā ("they did wrong in the matter of the signs"). The same rare construction in two places. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
وَلَقَدْ مَكَّنَّٰكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَجَعَلْنَا لَكُمْ فِيهَا مَعَٰيِشَ قَلِيلًا مَّا تَشْكُرُونَ
"We have established you on the earth and given you the means of livelihood in it. How little you give thanks!"
The concrete sense of the root: to provide a place for something, to settle it firmly. Makān is from the same root (some lexicographers count it from the root kawn; both views are transmitted, and I do not impose a preference). Tamkīn is to give someone the power to stand and to dispose in a place.
The root was treated at 12/21 and 12/56 in Yūsuf (wa kadhālika makkannā li-Yūsufa fi'l-arḍ) and at 18/84 in al-Kahf (innā makkannā lahū fi'l-arḍ). I rely on those treatments. I record the difference: there tamkīn was an authority given to one person; here it is a ground given to all mankind.
Maʿāyish, the plural of maʿīsha: the things by which life is lived, the means of livelihood. The root ع-ي-ش: to live. The same root was treated at 20/124 in Ṭāhā as maʿīshatan ḍankā (a straitened livelihood) — there the narrowing of livelihood is described, here its being given.
That the word comes in the plural must be recorded: not "a livelihood" but "livelihoods". What is stated is that there is on the earth not one path of living but many.
A point of word order and a link within the sūra must be recorded. The third verse ended with qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn; the tenth ends with qalīlan mā tashkurūn.
| Verse | Closing | What is little |
|---|---|---|
| 7/3 | Qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn | The littleness of taking to heart |
| 7/10 | Qalīlan mā tashkurūn | The littleness of thanks |
And the same closing was recorded at 32/9 in al-Sajda and at 23/78 in al-Muʾminūn — there it came after the giving of hearing, sight and heart. That triad will meet us again in verse 179 of al-Aʿrāf. A link can be drawn between the two places, and I give it as my own reading: the tenth verse names the ground that was given, the hundred and seventy-ninth the faculties that were given; the closing of both looks to the same place.
| Reading | What mā is | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Redundant (zāʾida, for emphasis) | "You give very little thanks" |
| 2 | Maṣdariyya | "Your giving of thanks is little" |
The verse separates the giving of a possibility from the noticing of that possibility. Makkannā and jaʿalnā are in the past tense — the work is done. Tashkurūn is imperfect — it is a continuing state.
That is, the text says with a tense that what was given is complete and the answer to it is deficient. This is something that can be read off the word order; there is no need to add an interpretation to it.
There are seven tellings of this story in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/30-38, al-Aʿrāf 7/11-25, al-Ḥijr 15/28-44, al-Isrāʾ 17/61-65, al-Kahf 18/50, Ṭāhā 20/115-123, Ṣād 38/71-85. That of al-Aʿrāf is the longest and the most detailed.
| File | What was treated | The name of the matter |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/30-38 | The vicegerent, the names, the question of the angels, lā taqrabā, azallahumā, repentance | Zalla — the slip |
| Ṣād 38/71-85 | The logical form of the anā khayrun minh syllogism, the table of خ-ي-ر, threefold emphasis | Qiyās — the error in reasoning |
| Ṭāhā 20/115-123 | Fa-nasiya, lam najid lahū ʿazmā, the single occurrence of abā, the words of the whispering | Nisyān — forgetting |
I rely on all three and do not repeat here what was treated there. The following in particular were exhausted there and will not be undone again here:
- That the prostration is not a prostration of worship, and that istikbār in Form X means "to reckon oneself great" (al-Baqara 2/34).
- The undoing of the syllogism anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn — the premises true, the conclusion not following from the premises; the comparison "fire burns and consumes, earth bears and brings forth"; the two-directional use of the root خ-ي-ر within Ṣād (Ṣād 38/76, al-Baqara 2/34).
- The question whether Iblīs was an angel (al-Baqara, al-Kahf 18/50).
- That the verbs come in the dual, and that the Qurʾān does not blame the woman separately (al-Baqara 2/35-36; as evidence Ṭāhā 20/120-121).
- The Qurʾān's silence about the kind of tree (al-Baqara 2/35). This commentary will be silent too; no entry is made into the Isrāʾīliyyāt.
| # | What is peculiar to al-Aʿrāf | Verse | Where else it occurs |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākum — an opening in the plural address | 11 | Nowhere |
| 2 | Fa-bimā aghwaytanī la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm | 16 | Nowhere |
| 3 | Min bayni aydīhim wa min khalfihim wa ʿan aymānihim wa ʿan shamāʾilihim — four directions | 17 | Nowhere |
| 4 | Mā nahākumā rabbukumā … illā an takūnā malakayni aw takūnā mina'l-khālidīn — the ground of the whispering | 20 | In Ṭāhā with a different sentence (20/120) |
And two verbs are peculiar to al-Aʿrāf: qāsamahumā (21) and dallāhumā (22). Both will be undone separately below.
وَلَقَدْ خَلَقْنَٰكُمْ ثُمَّ صَوَّرْنَٰكُمْ ثُمَّ قُلْنَا لِلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ ٱسْجُدُوا۟ لِءَادَمَ فَسَجَدُوٓا۟ إِلَّآ إِبْلِيسَ لَمْ يَكُن مِّنَ ٱلسَّٰجِدِينَ
Wa laqad khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākum thumma qulnā li'l-malāʾikati'sjudū li-Ādama fa-sajadū illā Iblīsa lam yakun mina's-sājidīn
"We created you, then We gave you form, then We said to the angels, 'Prostrate yourselves to Adam'; and they prostrated themselves, all but Iblīs — he was not among those who prostrated."
| Sūra | Opening | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/30 | Innī jāʿilun fi'l-arḍi khalīfa | To the angels |
| al-Ḥijr 15/28 | Innī khāliqun basharan | To the angels |
| Ṣād 38/71 | Innī khāliqun basharan min ṭīn | To the angels |
| Ṭāhā 20/115 | Wa laqad ʿahidnā ilā Ādam | Narrative |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/11 | Wa laqad khalaqnākum thumma ṣawwarnākum | Directly to the reader |
The verse does not say "We created Adam"; it says "We created you." Then within the same sentence it passes over to Adam.
| Reading | Ground |
|---|---|
| 1 | The pronoun kum means Adam, because the human species is gathered in him; it means "your forefather was created" |
| 2 | The pronoun really does mean all mankind; creation and forming look to the human kind, the command to prostrate to Adam |
Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. But this is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: whichever reading is taken, the word order places the reader inside the story. And from the twenty-sixth verse on the sūra will call out yā banī Ādam — that is, the narrative begins with a pronoun that makes the reader an addressee and continues with a vocative that makes him an addressee.
The sense of the root: to give a thing form, shape, figure. Ṣūra is from the same root; muṣawwir is among the names of God (al-Ḥashr 59/24).
The root was treated at 82/7-8 in al-Infiṭār (fa-sawwāka fa-ʿadalaka fī ayyi ṣūratin mā shāʾa rakkabak) and at 40/64 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) and 64/3 in al-Taghābun (wa ṣawwarakum fa-aḥsana ṣuwarakum). I rely on those treatments.
The particle ثُمَّ states sequence and interval (fāʾ states immediate sequence). That is, the text counts three stages separately: creating, forming, the command to prostrate.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the particle itself: the command to prostrate comes not immediately after the creating, but after the forming. And at 38/72 in Ṣād the ground of the command was given as fa-idhā sawwaytuhū wa nafakhtu fīhi min rūḥī — there too the taswiya (the setting in order) is named before the command. The two sūras keep the same order.
| Sūra | The expression used of Iblīs | What it states |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/34 | Abā wa'stakbara wa kāna mina'l-kāfirīn | Three verbs |
| Ṣād 38/74 | Istakbara wa kāna mina'l-kāfirīn | Two verbs |
| Ṭāhā 20/116 | Abā | One verb |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/11 | Lam yakun mina's-sājidīn | No verb — a not-belonging to a group |
Al-Aʿrāf states not something Iblīs did but something he was not: "he was not among those who prostrated."
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of the four sūras: where the other three give the act (abā, istakbara), al-Aʿrāf gives the position. And this accords with al-Aʿrāf's building the whole story as a separation: in later sections too the sūra will always name people in two groups (farīqan hadā wa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalāla, 30; aṣḥābu'l-janna / aṣḥābu'n-nār, 44). The language of al-Aʿrāf is the language of groups.
Note: the debate over whether the exception in fa-sajadū illā Iblīsa is connected (muttaṣil) or disconnected (munqaṭiʿ) — that is, whether Iblīs was counted among the angels — was treated in al-Baqara and at 18/50 in al-Kahf. I rely on those treatments; I do not repeat them here.
قَالَ مَا مَنَعَكَ أَلَّا تَسْجُدَ إِذْ أَمَرْتُكَ قَالَ أَنَا۠ خَيْرٌ مِّنْهُ خَلَقْتَنِى مِن نَّارٍ وَخَلَقْتَهُۥ مِن طِينٍ
Qāla mā manaʿaka allā tasjuda idh amartuk · Qāla anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn
"He said: 'What kept you from prostrating when I commanded you?' · He said: 'I am better than he; You created me from fire, and You created him from clay.'"
The undoing of the sentence anā khayrun minhu khalaqtanī min nārin wa khalaqtahū min ṭīn was carried out in full at 38/76 in Ṣād, and its ground was laid at 2/34 in al-Baqara. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them here. What was treated there:
- The logical form of the syllogism: both premises are true (khalaqtanī min nār and khalaqtahū min ṭīn are each statements of fact); the error lies in a step of superiority that does not follow from the premises being added of its own accord.
- "Fire burns and consumes; earth bears and brings forth" — that the comparison resting on the quality of the materials is itself faulty.
- That Iblīs's answer says nothing at all about the command: the question was about obedience, the answer about worth.
- The table of the root خ-ي-ر: al-akhyār (Ṣād 38/47) is an attribute that has been given, anā khayrun minh an attribute that is claimed.
- Mā manaʿaka — not "why did you not prostrate" but "what kept you": the word order that shows prostration was taken as a matter of course.
The two sūras give the same sentence but build the question differently. The difference is a single letter, and it must be recorded.
| Sūra | Question | Difference |
|---|---|---|
| Ṣād 38/75 | Mā manaʿaka an tasjuda li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayy | An — affirmative |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/12 | Mā manaʿaka allā tasjuda idh amartuk | Allā (an lā) — negative |
| al-Ḥijr 15/32 | Mā laka allā takūna maʿa's-sājidīn | Allā — negative |
That is, in al-Aʿrāf and al-Ḥijr the question takes the form "what kept you from not prostrating?" This is a construction that has drawn notice in Arabic, and two explanations are transmitted:
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| 1 | Lā is redundant (for emphasis); the sense is the same as in Ṣād: "what kept you from prostrating" |
| 2 | Lā is not redundant; the verb manaʿaka has been given by taḍmīn the sense "what drove you to this": "what carried you to not prostrating" |
Both explanations have been voiced by the classical lexicographers; I do not impose a preference. Both arrive at the same result: the question is asking for a ground.
In Ṣād the note added to the question was li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayy (treated in Ṣād with the table of tafwīḍ/taʾwīl). The note al-Aʿrāf adds is a different one: idh amartuk — "when I commanded you".
| Sūra | Added to the question | What it draws attention to |
|---|---|---|
| Ṣād 38/75 | Li-mā khalaqtu bi-yadayy | To the standing of the one prostrated to |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/12 | Idh amartuk | To the command itself |
And Iblīs's answer is the same in both: he speaks of the material. That is, in al-Aʿrāf the question expressly recalls the command, and the answer again passes over the command. This makes the observation recorded in Ṣād — "the question was about obedience, the answer about worth" — sharper in al-Aʿrāf, because in al-Aʿrāf the command is expressly named in the question.
Ṭīn: earth mixed with water, clay. The root was treated at 38/71 in Ṣād (khāliqun basharan min ṭīn). I rely on that treatment.
The Qurʾān names the substance from which man was created with more than one word, and this is a countable datum:
| Word | Meaning | Where |
|---|---|---|
| Turāb | Dry earth | 3/59, 22/5, 30/20 |
| Ṭīn | Earth mixed with water | 7/12, 38/71, 6/2 |
| Ṭīn lāzib | Sticky clay | 37/11 |
| Ḥamaʾ masnūn | Altered, foul-smelling mud | 15/26, 28, 33 |
| Ṣalṣāl ka'l-fakhkhār | Dry clay like baked pottery | 55/14 |
| Sulāla min ṭīn | An extract drawn from clay | 23/12 |
These words were treated separately at 55/14 in al-Raḥmān and at 23/12 in al-Muʾminūn. The one note that belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: the word that comes out of Iblīs's mouth is ṭīn — not dry earth but clay. And with the nār (fire) he sets against it, this word forms two extremes: the most mobile and the most inert. Why the comparison is itself faulty was treated in al-Baqara and Ṣād; I rely on those treatments.
قَالَ فَٱهْبِطْ مِنْهَا فَمَا يَكُونُ لَكَ أَن تَتَكَبَّرَ فِيهَا فَٱخْرُجْ إِنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰغِرِينَ
"He said: 'Then go down from it! It is not for you to be great in it. Go out! You are among the lowly.'"
A point of word order must be recorded: the verse has three commands, and two of them do the same work.
| Order | Command | Root | What it states |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Fa'hbiṭ | ه-ب-ط | Go down — movement downward |
| 2 | — | — | Fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā — the ground |
| 3 | Fa'khruj | خ-ر-ج | Go out — movement outward |
The two verbs state two different directions: hubūṭ is vertical (downward), khurūj horizontal (outward). And the ground comes in between them.
The root ه-ب-ط: to come down from a high place. The root was treated at 2/36 and 2/61 in al-Baqara (ihbiṭū miṣran) and at 11/48 in Hūd (ihbiṭ bi-salāmin minnā). I rely on those treatments.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the same verb (ihbiṭū) will be said to Adam too in the twenty-fourth verse. That is, in al-Aʿrāf both Iblīs and Adam receive the command "go down" — but alongside Iblīs's there stands innaka mina'ṣ-ṣāghirīn, and alongside Adam's wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn. The same verb, with two different endings. This is a contrast that can be verified from the text.
The sense of the root: smallness. *Ṣaghār is explained by the lexicographers as "abasement, being brought low" — that is, not smallness of size but smallness of position.
The word will occur a second time in this sūra: wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn (119) — used of Pharaoh's side when the sorcerers are defeated.
| Place | Who | Context |
|---|---|---|
| 7/13 | Iblīs | The answer to making oneself great |
| 7/119 | Pharaoh's sorcerers / his side | The answer to defeat |
I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same word both at the beginning of the story and in the middle of it. And in both places the word comes as the answer to takabbur (making oneself great) — expressly in verse 13 (an tatakabbara fīhā → mina'ṣ-ṣāghirīn), indirectly in verse 119 (fa-ghulibū hunālika wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn).
The sentence does not forbid by saying "do not be great"; it says "being great is not a thing that is to be yours".
The pattern mā yakūnu laka an… in Arabic gives the sense "this is not for you, this does not befit you". The same pattern was treated at 19/35 in Maryam (mā kāna li'llāhi an yattakhidha min walad) and at 33/36 in al-Aḥzāb.
I record this as my own reading: the sentence is not a prohibition but a statement of impossibility. What Iblīs did is named not as a thing forbidden to be done but as a thing that will not be. And the finding recorded in al-Baqara, that pride is not a reality but a supposition, finds its counterpart here at the level of word order — the "to reckon it so" sense of Form X / Form V and the "not a thing that will be" sense of the pattern mā yakūnu laka look to the same place.
قَالَ أَنظِرْنِىٓ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ يُبْعَثُونَ · قَالَ إِنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلْمُنظَرِينَ
"He said: 'Give me respite until the day they are raised.' · He said: 'You are among those given respite.'"
The primary sense of the root is "to look"; in Form IV (anẓara) it means "to grant someone a span of looking", that is, to give a reprieve. The three occurrences of the root were tabulated at 38/79-80 in Ṣād (Ṣād 38/15, 79, 80). I rely on that treatment.
This is a difference that must be recorded, and it was tabulated as a disagreement in Ṣād. Here I only repeat the datum:
| Sūra | What Iblīs asked | The answer given |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/14-15 | Ilā yawmi yubʿathūn | Innaka mina'l-munẓarīn — the limit is not stated |
| al-Ḥijr 15/36-38 | Ilā yawmi yubʿathūn | Innaka mina'l-munẓarīn — ilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm |
| Ṣād 38/79-81 | Ilā yawmi yubʿathūn | Innaka mina'l-munẓarīn — ilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm |
Al-Aʿrāf does not give the note (ilā yawmi'l-waqti'l-maʿlūm) found in the other two sūras. This is a countable absence, and the disagreement "are the two expressions the same" was tabulated in Ṣād; I do not impose a preference.
I record this as an observation: the answer does not say "as much as you asked", it says "you are among those given respite". The request contains a date; the answer contents itself with including him in a group. And al-Aʿrāf, by not naming here the limit the other two sūras set, keeps this indefiniteness of the answer.
قَالَ فَبِمَآ أَغْوَيْتَنِى لَأَقْعُدَنَّ لَهُمْ صِرَٰطَكَ ٱلْمُسْتَقِيمَ · ثُمَّ لَءَاتِيَنَّهُم مِّنۢ بَيْنِ أَيْدِيهِمْ وَمِنْ خَلْفِهِمْ وَعَنْ أَيْمَٰنِهِمْ وَعَن شَمَآئِلِهِمْ وَلَا تَجِدُ أَكْثَرَهُمْ شَٰكِرِينَ
Qāla fa-bimā aghwaytanī la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm · Thumma la-ātiyannahum min bayni aydīhim wa min khalfihim wa ʿan aymānihim wa ʿan shamāʾilihim, wa lā tajidu aktharahum shākirīn
"He said: 'For Your having led me astray, I shall certainly sit for them upon Your straight path. · Then I shall come at them from before them and from behind them and from their right and from their left. And You will not find most of them thankful.'"
The root غ-و-ي: to stray from the right path, to go astray, to miss the mark. The lexicographers define ghayy as the opposite of rushd (rightness). The root was treated at 20/121 in Ṭāhā (wa ʿaṣā Ādamu rabbahū fa-ghawā); I rely on that treatment.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/16 | Fa-bimā aghwaytanī | Iblīs — about himself |
| 7/146 | Wa in yaraw sabīla'l-ghayyi yattakhidhūhu sabīlā | Those turned away from the signs |
| 7/175 | Fa-kāna mina'l-ghāwīn | The man who slipped out of the signs |
| 7/202 | Yamuddūnahum fi'l-ghayyi | The brothers of the satans |
Four occurrences; the first in verse 16, the last in verse 202. The sūra uses the root both at its beginning and at its end.
Two readings are transmitted of the bāʾ in the phrase fa-bimā aghwaytanī, and each changes the meaning:
| Reading | The function of the bāʾ | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Sababiyya (stating cause) | "Because You led me astray" — he gives a cause |
| 2 | Qasam (the bāʾ of the oath) | "By Your having led me astray" — he swears an oath |
The ground of the second reading is that the answer comes as la-aqʿudanna, with the lām and the emphatic nūn; this is the pattern of the response to an oath in Arabic. Both readings have been voiced by the classical lexicographers; I do not impose a preference.
And the comparison recorded at 2/37 in al-Baqara is completed here: there Adam's prayer (rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā) was compared with Iblīs's sentence, and it was recorded that "Iblīs too spoke, but he gave a ground and laid the blame on God (al-Aʿrāf 7/16)". I rely on that treatment.
What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: Iblīs's first sentence (12) put forward his own superiority; his second sentence (16) hands off his own responsibility. There is an inconsistency between the two sentences, and the text leaves it without repair: the superiority is his own, the going astray another's.
The root ق-ع-د: to sit. That this verb is the one chosen here must be recorded: not "I shall attack" or "I shall obstruct", but "I shall sit".
A point of word order: la-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm — ṣirāṭ comes in the accusative, that is, in the position of an adverbial: "upon the path / along the path". In Arabic a noun of place put in the accusative without fī gives the sense "in that place, along that place".
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb and of the position: sitting is an act of waiting and of cutting off the road; it is an act not of moving but of taking up a position. And the place chosen is not a crooked road — it is ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm, "Your straight path".
And this overlaps with verse 86 of the same sūra: Shuʿayb says to his people wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāh — word for word the same verb, word for word the same work.
| Place | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 7/16 | Iblīs | La-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm |
| 7/86 | The notables of Madyan | Wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāh |
I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text: the sūra shows in the eighty-sixth verse the threat uttered in the sixteenth carried out by human hands. There are seventy verses between the two; but the verb and the object are the same.
This is the most distinctive sentence of al-Aʿrāf, and it is treated in full in this index here for the first time.
| Direction | Expression | Particle |
|---|---|---|
| Front | Min bayni aydīhim | min |
| Behind | Min khalfihim | min |
| Right | ʿAn aymānihim | ʿan |
| Left | ʿAn shamāʾilihim | ʿan |
One — the particle changes. In the first two directions min comes, in the last two ʿan. In Arabic min states a starting point, "out of / from the side of"; ʿan states moving away and lateral position, "over, alongside". This is a datum of word order. The lexicographers have recorded this difference and given various explanations for it; I am not in a position to transmit any of them as certain, so I record only the datum.
Two — the pair bayna yadayh / khalfah was treated earlier in the index. At 41/25 in Fuṣṣilat this pair occurred as the extent of the adorning done by the qarīns, and at 41/42 as the extent of the Book's being guarded, and it was recorded there: "in Arabic this pair is used to cover all the sides of a thing." I rely on that treatment.
| Place | How many directions | For what |
|---|---|---|
| Fuṣṣilat 41/25 | Two — mā bayna aydīhim wa mā khalfahum | The extent of the adorning |
| Fuṣṣilat 41/42 | Two — min bayni yadayhi wa lā min khalfih | The extent of the guarding |
| Sabaʾ 34/9 · al-Baqara 2/255 | Two | Encompassing / knowledge |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/17 | Four — front, behind, right, left | The extent of the approach |
I record this as an observation. The text counts four directions and does not complete the six: fawq (above) and taḥt (below) are not in the sentence. And this is not a claim of deficiency; it is the datum of the text.
Explanations of this gap are transmitted in the classical commentaries — it is widely said that "above was not counted because it is the direction from which mercy comes". This is a transmitted view; I make no firm preference and do not use it as a proof. All I record is this: the text counts four directions, not six.
| Place | Expression | Directions |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/17 | Min bayni aydīhim… wa ʿan shamāʾilihim | Four |
| al-Anʿām 6/65 | Min fawqikum aw min taḥti arjulikum | Above and below — but there what comes is the punishment, not Iblīs |
| al-Naḥl 16/26 | Fa-ata'llāhu bunyānahum mina'l-qawāʿid | From the foundations |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the comparison of the three verses: the Qurʾān uses the directions above and below in other contexts — there the agent is God. In al-Aʿrāf 7/17 the agent is Iblīs, and the directions he counts are man's horizontal surroundings. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The last part of the sentence must be recorded, and it establishes a link that can be verified within the sūra.
The tenth verse ended with qalīlan mā tashkurūn. The seventeenth ends with wa lā tajidu aktharahum shākirīn.
I record this as an observation: there are seven verses between the two, and both end with the same root (ش-ك-ر). One is a finding, the other a forecast. And the text does not correct Iblīs's forecast — as was also recorded at 38/82-85 of Ṣād (Ṣād), the judgement is tied not to who Iblīs is but to who follows him. I rely on that treatment.
And the choice of the word is worth recording: Iblīs does not say "they will not believe", he says "they will not give thanks". I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word itself: shukr is the noticing of what has been given. The tenth verse had counted what was given (the earth, the means of livelihood); the seventeenth says that what was given will not be noticed.
قَالَ ٱخْرُجْ مِنْهَا مَذْءُومًا مَّدْحُورًا لَّمَن تَبِعَكَ مِنْهُمْ لَأَمْلَأَنَّ جَهَنَّمَ مِنكُمْ أَجْمَعِينَ
"He said: 'Go out from it, despised and driven away! Whoever of them follows you — I shall surely fill Hell with the whole lot of you.'"
Both words are on the pattern of the passive participle (مَفْعُول) — that is, both state "the one to whom it is done", not "the one who does".
| Word | Root | Concrete sense |
|---|---|---|
| مَذْءُوم | ذ-ء-م | Faulted, despised — the root carries "to name a thing's defect" |
| مَّدْحُور | د-ح-ر | Pushed off and driven away, expelled |
The root د-ح-ر: to push, to drive off, to send away. The root was treated at 37/9 in al-Ṣāffāt (duḥūran) — there the driving off of those who would eavesdrop on heaven was described. I rely on that treatment.
The root ذ-ء-م occurs in this index here for the first time, and it is found only in this verse in the Qurʾān. The lexicographers explain dhaʾama as "to fault, to find defective" and record its kinship with the word dhamm (blame). This kinship is a relation drawn by the lexicographers; I do not give it as a settled etymological ruling.
A point of word order must be recorded: both words stand in the position of a circumstantial accusative (ḥāl), and there is no conjunction between them. Madhʾūman madḥūrā — "despised, driven away." Sequence without a conjunction shows in Arabic that the two attributes join into a single state.
And the order of the two words is worth recording: first being despised (loss of worth), then being driven away (loss of place). I give this as my own reading: the command to leave had already been given in the thirteenth verse (fa'khruj); as it is repeated here, two attributes are added to it. That is, the second command to leave specifies the character of the first.
This sentence occurs in four places in the Qurʾān, and it was treated at 38/85 in Ṣād. I rely on that treatment.
| Place | Sentence |
|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/18 | La-amlaʾanna jahannama minkum ajmaʿīn |
| Hūd 11/119 | La-amlaʾanna jahannama mina'l-jinnati wa'n-nāsi ajmaʿīn (Hūd) |
| Ṣād 38/85 | La-amlaʾanna jahannama minka wa mimman tabiʿaka minhum ajmaʿīn |
| al-Sajda 32/13 | La-amlaʾanna jahannama mina'l-jinnati wa'n-nāsi ajmaʿīn (al-Sajda) |
The difference of al-Aʿrāf is in the pronoun: minkum — plural, "of you". In Ṣād the two parts were counted separately, minka wa mimman tabiʿaka (of you and of those who follow you); al-Aʿrāf gathers both into a single pronoun.
And the construction of the sentence must be recorded: la-man tabiʿaka minhum is a conditional clause, and its answer is directly the announcement of Hell. That is, the judgement is tied not to Iblīs but to those who follow him. The same note was entered in Ṣād — there the link of the root ت-ب-ع between 38/26 and 38/85 was established. I rely on that treatment.
What belongs here is this: in al-Aʿrāf the same root (ت-ب-ع) occurred in the third verse as a command — ittabiʿū mā unzila ilaykum / wa lā tattabiʿū min dūnihī awliyāʾ. The eighteenth verse states what answers to that prohibition: la-man tabiʿaka minhum. The sūra brings its own command to its conclusion fifteen verses later. This is a link that can be verified from the text.
وَيَٰٓـَٔادَمُ ٱسْكُنْ أَنتَ وَزَوْجُكَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ فَكُلَا مِنْ حَيْثُ شِئْتُمَا وَلَا تَقْرَبَا هَٰذِهِ ٱلشَّجَرَةَ فَتَكُونَا مِنَ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
Wa yā Ādamu'skun anta wa zawjuka'l-jannata fa-kulā min ḥaythu shiʾtumā wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn
"And, O Adam, dwell you and your wife in the Garden; eat from wherever you wish; but do not go near this tree, or you will be among the wrongdoers."
A point of word order must be recorded: the verse begins with a wāw. Wa yā Ādam — that is, this address is built as the continuation of the preceding speech.
I record this as an observation: what is said to Iblīs and what is said to Adam are given as a single sequence of speech. In al-Baqara the two scenes were built separately (2/34 and 2/35); al-Aʿrāf joins them with a wāw.
This pattern was treated at 2/35 in al-Baqara, and it was recorded there: the prohibition is placed not on the act but on the distance that leads to the act; from this the principle of "closing the means" has been derived, and the parallel of al-Isrāʾ 17/32 (wa lā taqrabu'z-zinā) was given. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.
And it was recorded at 2/187 in al-Baqara that the same pattern returns in the form tilka ḥudūdu'llāhi fa-lā taqrabūhā. I rely on that treatment as well.
| Sūra | Prohibition | The name of the outcome |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/35 | Wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata | Fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/19 | Wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata | Fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn |
| Ṭāhā 20/117 | Fa-lā yukhrijannakumā mina'l-janna | Fa-tashqā — you will fall into hardship |
Al-Baqara and al-Aʿrāf are word for word identical at this point. Ṭāhā, however, builds the prohibition not upon the tree but upon Iblīs, and names the outcome shaqāwa (hardship) — this was treated in Ṭāhā as the backbone of that sūra.
And the expression fa-takūnā mina'ẓ-ẓālimīn must be recorded: the outcome is given as belonging to a group — exactly like lam yakun mina's-sājidīn in the eleventh verse. The group language of al-Aʿrāf is at work here too.
And this expression overlaps with the confession in the twenty-third verse: rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā. The root used in the warning (ظ-ل-م) is used in the confession too. That is, the confession is made with the word of the warning. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
A point of word order: the permission comes as min ḥaythu shiʾtumā ("from wherever you wish"), the prohibition as hādhihi'sh-shajarata ("this tree") — the one open-ended, the other bounded by a demonstrative.
In al-Baqara 2/35 the permission was raghadan ḥaythu shiʾtumā ("in plenty, from wherever you wish"). Al-Aʿrāf does not give the word raghadan. This is a countable difference.
I record this as an observation: both texts give the permission before the prohibition, and the permission is wider than the prohibition. The prohibition is one tree; the permission is all the rest.
فَوَسْوَسَ لَهُمَا ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ لِيُبْدِىَ لَهُمَا مَا وُۥرِىَ عَنْهُمَا مِن سَوْءَٰتِهِمَا وَقَالَ مَا نَهَىٰكُمَا رَبُّكُمَا عَنْ هَٰذِهِ ٱلشَّجَرَةِ إِلَّآ أَن تَكُونَا مَلَكَيْنِ أَوْ تَكُونَا مِنَ ٱلْخَٰلِدِينَ · وَقَاسَمَهُمَآ إِنِّى لَكُمَا لَمِنَ ٱلنَّٰصِحِينَ
Fa-waswasa lahumā'sh-shayṭānu li-yubdiya lahumā mā wūriya ʿanhumā min sawʾātihimā wa qāla mā nahākumā rabbukumā ʿan hādhihi'sh-shajarati illā an takūnā malakayni aw takūnā mina'l-khālidīn · Wa qāsamahumā innī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn
"Then Satan whispered to them, to make plain to them what had been covered from them of their shameful parts, and he said: 'Your Lord forbade you this tree only lest you become two angels or become of those who abide for ever.' · And he swore to them: 'I am indeed one of those who wish you well.'"
The root و-س-و-س: a very light, continuous sound, a sound at the level of a whisper. The lexicographers explain waswasa by "the faint sound made by ornaments touching one another". In respect of its pattern it counts as a sound-imitating word (onomatopoeia). The root was treated in al-Nās (al-waswāsi'l-khannās) and at 20/120 in Ṭāhā. I rely on those treatments.
| Place | Verb + particle | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| Ṭāhā 20/120 | Fa-waswasa ilayhi 'sh-shayṭān | To Adam (singular) |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/20 | Fa-waswasa lahumā 'sh-shayṭān | To the two of them (dual) |
Ilā states direction ("towards him"); the lām here means "for them, to them". The lexicographers record that the usage waswasa lahū carries the tone "he whispered for him, as though on his side". This is a transmitted report; I do not give it as a settled ruling.
And the number of those addressed must be recorded: in al-Aʿrāf the whispering is to the two of them at once. At 2/35-36 in al-Baqara the coming of the verbs in the dual and the Qurʾān's not blaming the woman separately were treated; I rely on that treatment. Al-Aʿrāf strengthens that datum: the addressee of the whispering is dual as well.
Sawʾa is the singular of sawʾāt; the root س-و-أ: to be bad, to be ugly. Sūʾ, sayyiʾa, aswaʾ are from the same root. Sawʾa is used in the sense of "the place whose exposure is not welcome", and this is a covering that comes from the word itself.
A point of word order must be recorded: the word is not directly the name of an organ. That is, the Qurʾān names the place that is to be covered not by its name but by its quality.
I record this as an observation: the word is itself a covering. And the word occurs five times in this sūra — 20, 22, 26, 27 (twice). Three of the five occurrences are in the yā banī Ādam section. That is, what is named in the story is bound immediately afterwards to the reader.
The root و-ر-ي: to cover, to conceal. The same root will be repeated in verse 26 as yuwārī sawʾātikum.
A point of word order: wūriya is a passive verb — "that which had been covered". The agent is not stated.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the voice of the verb: the text does not say "what they had covered" or "what God had covered"; it says only "what had been covered". And in the twenty-sixth verse the same root will come back in the active: libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum — there what covers is clothing, and that clothing has been sent down (anzalnā). A relation of answer can be drawn between the two verses; but I give this not as a certainty, only as a possible reading.
The twentieth verse gives Iblīs's sentence in full, and this sentence is found nowhere else in the Qurʾān:
The construction of the sentence is a restriction (ḥaṣr, qaṣr): mā … illā — "He did not forbid it, except for this".
That is, Iblīs alters the ground of the prohibition: the prohibition is presented not as protection but as obstruction.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the grammatical structure of the sentence: Iblīs does not deny the prohibition. He accepts that it exists, and renames its intention. And this is an operation of the same kind as the syllogism in the twelfth verse: there a false conclusion was added to true premises; here a false ground is added to a true piece of knowledge (that there is a prohibition).
The first reading is the widespread one; the second is also transmitted. I do not impose a preference.
As ground for the second reading the sentence at 20/120 in Ṭāhā is cited: hal adulluka ʿalā shajarati'l-khuldi wa mulkin lā yablā — "the tree of immortality and a kingdom that does not decay". That is, the two things promised in Ṭāhā are immortality and kingship.
| Sūra | The first thing promised | The second thing promised |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/20 | Malakayn (or malikayn) | Mina'l-khālidīn — those who abide for ever |
| Ṭāhā 20/120 | Mulkin lā yablā — a kingdom that does not decay | Shajarati'l-khuld — the tree of immortality |
In both sūras the second thing is the same: immortality. In the first thing the widespread reading of al-Aʿrāf says "angel", that of Ṭāhā says "kingdom". This promise was treated at 20/120-123 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.
I record this as an observation: both promises are promises of crossing man's limit — one of kind (to become an angel or a king), the other of duration (to become deathless). And read together with the four directions of the seventeenth verse, it becomes visible that Iblīs's offers are always a promise of widening. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The root ق-س-م: to divide, to apportion; qasam is an oath. Qāsama is a verb of Form III (فَاعَلَ), and this form in Arabic states reciprocity.
A point of word order must be recorded, and the lexicographers have recorded it: qāsamahumā — "he exchanged oaths with them". The verb is in a pattern that implies not merely that Iblīs swore, but as though there were a mutual swearing.
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| 1 | Form III is here for intensification; it states a one-sided but insistent oath |
| 2 | There really is reciprocity: Iblīs swore, and they declared their trust in him |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: the choice of the verb shows that the deception is built not like a one-way assault but like an exchange. And the verb dallāhumā in the next verse will look to the same place.
The root ن-ص-ح: to make a thing pure and unmixed (honey is called nāṣiḥ, "unmixed") and to sew up a tear (niṣāḥa — sewing). Both branches are recorded: counsel carries both the idea of sincerity and the idea of mending.
And this must be recorded — it is a pattern that can be verified within the sūra: the same root occurs four times in the sequence of prophets in al-Aʿrāf, and in all four it is used of true prophets.
| Verse | Who | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| 7/21 | Iblīs | Innī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn |
| 7/62 | Noah | Wa anṣaḥu lakum |
| 7/68 | Hūd | Wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn |
| 7/79 | Ṣāliḥ | Wa naṣaḥtu lakum wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn |
| 7/93 | Shuʿayb | Wa naṣaḥtu lakum |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the five verses themselves: the sūra puts the same claim into the mouth of the liar and of the truthful alike — and shows what separates them not in the words but in the outcome. Ṣāliḥ's sentence in the seventy-ninth verse is the ground of this reading: wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn — "but you do not love those who wish you well." That is, the truth of the words is not measured by their being accepted.
فَدَلَّىٰهُمَا بِغُرُورٍ فَلَمَّا ذَاقَا ٱلشَّجَرَةَ بَدَتْ لَهُمَا سَوْءَٰتُهُمَا وَطَفِقَا يَخْصِفَانِ عَلَيْهِمَا مِن وَرَقِ ٱلْجَنَّةِ وَنَادَىٰهُمَا رَبُّهُمَآ أَلَمْ أَنْهَكُمَا عَن تِلْكُمَا ٱلشَّجَرَةِ وَأَقُل لَّكُمَآ إِنَّ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنَ لَكُمَا عَدُوٌّ مُّبِينٌ
Fa-dallāhumā bi-ghurūr, fa-lammā dhāqā'sh-shajarata badat lahumā sawʾātuhumā wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-janna, wa nādāhumā rabbuhumā a-lam anhakumā ʿan tilkumā'sh-shajarati wa aqul lakumā inna'sh-shayṭāna lakumā ʿaduwwun mubīn
"So he lowered them down by deception. When they had tasted the tree, their shameful parts became apparent to them, and they set about patching over themselves with the leaves of the Garden. And their Lord called out to them: 'Did I not forbid you that tree, and say to you that Satan is an open enemy to you?'"
This is the most striking verb in al-Aʿrāf, and that the deception is told with this verb must be recorded separately.
The root د-ل-و was undone in full at 53/8 in al-Najm (thumma danā fa-tadallā). I rely on that treatment and do not undo the root again. A summary of what was recorded there:
- Dalw = bucket — the vessel tied to a rope and let down to draw water from a well; Yūsuf 12/19 (fa-adlā dalwahū) was given as evidence.
- Table of derivatives: adlā (Form IV, transitive — he let down) / tadallā (Form V, reflexive — he let himself down).
- The key image: "the bucket is let down into the well; what goes down goes down while remaining attached to what is above."
- The relation dalīl–dalāla ("evidence is the rope let down towards the unknown") was transmitted with a note of caution.
And at 2/188 in al-Baqara the same root occurred in the form wa tudlū bihā ila'l-ḥukkām — there, the letting down of property to a judge like a bucket. I rely on both places.
| Pattern | Verb | Who/what |
|---|---|---|
| IV (ifʿāl) | Adlā | Yūsuf 12/19 — he let his bucket down |
| V (tafaʿʿul) | Tadallā | al-Najm 53/8 — he let himself down |
| II (tafʿīl) | Dallā | al-Aʿrāf 7/22 — he let the two of them down |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the deception is told here not as "he tricked" or "he misled" but as he let them down. And the picture of the bucket carries three things at once:
| Element of the picture | Its counterpart in the verse |
|---|---|
| The bucket goes down | The deceived goes down |
| What goes down is tied to a rope — it does not go down of itself | The deceiver holds it from above |
| The bucket is let down in order to take water | The deception carries a promise of gain |
The third line is especially worth recording, and it overlaps with the twentieth verse: Iblīs's promise was a promise of gain (to become angels, to become deathless). The bucket too does not go down empty; it goes down to take water. I give this as a reading, not as a certainty.
And a second sense recorded by the lexicographers is transmitted: the sense of tadliya as "to embolden someone, to egg him on". This is a transmitted view; the primary sense (to let down) is the more widespread and accords with the concrete sense of the root.
The concrete sense of the root: the surface of a thing, its outward look — and from this, to be taken in by the look of a thing. Ghurra is the bright white of the forehead, gharīr an inexperienced youth, ghurūr delusion.
The root was treated at 31/33 in Luqmān and at 35/5 in Fāṭir (wa lā yaghurrannakum bi'llāhi'l-gharūr); also at 57/20 in al-Ḥadīd (matāʿu'l-ghurūr). I rely on those treatments.
A point of word order: bi-ghurūr comes indefinite, and the bāʾ here states either instrument or state. Both readings are possible: "he let them down with a deception" or "they went down deluded". The first is the widespread one.
And the second occurrence of the same root in this sūra is in verse 51: wa gharrathumu'l-ḥayātu'd-dunyā — "the life of this world deluded them". I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same verb both at the beginning of the story (Satan's deception) and in the scene of the gathering (the world's deception).
The verb ط-ف-ق is an auxiliary verb in the sense "to set about a thing, to begin" (one of the verbs of inception, afʿāl al-shurūʿ). In Arabic the predicate of such verbs comes in the imperfect — and here yakhṣifāni is imperfect.
The root خ-ص-ف: to add one thing to another, to patch. The lexicographers explain khaṣf as the verb used for the mending of shoes: khaṣafa'n-naʿl — "he patched the sandal, he stitched layer on layer."
| Sūra | Expression | Difference |
|---|---|---|
| Ṭāhā 20/121 | Wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-janna | The same |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/22 | Wa ṭafiqā yakhṣifāni ʿalayhimā min waraqi'l-janna | Word for word the same |
The two sūras overlap word for word in this sentence. It was treated at 20/120-123 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.
What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: the verb is not "they covered" but "they set about patching". Leaf on leaf, layer on layer — that is, not a ready covering but a covering in the making. And in the twenty-sixth verse its opposite will come: qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan — a covering sent down, ready made.
| Place | Covering | From where |
|---|---|---|
| 7/22 | Waraqi'l-janna — the leaves of the Garden | By their own hands, by patching |
| 7/26 | Libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum | Anzalnā — by being sent down |
There are four verses between the two, and both describe the same act (covering oneself); but their sources differ. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding.
| Part | What is recalled | Where it had been said |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | A-lam anhakumā ʿan tilkumā'sh-shajarah | In verse 19 — wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarah |
| 2 | Wa aqul lakumā inna'sh-shayṭāna lakumā ʿaduwwun mubīn | Not told in al-Aʿrāf — it is in Ṭāhā 20/117 |
The second part must be recorded: God recalls a word He had said earlier; but al-Aʿrāf had not told that word. The same warning occurs at 20/117 in Ṭāhā: yā Ādamu inna hādhā ʿaduwwun laka wa li-zawjika.
I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts: al-Aʿrāf gives the warning Ṭāhā tells only in the form of a reminder. That is, the two sūras complete one another — and this is a countable datum about the way the Qurʾān tells its stories. The same phenomenon (different parts of the same story being given in different sūras) was tabulated in detail in Hūd and al-Shuʿarāʾ; I rely on those treatments.
And the demonstrative must be recorded: tilkumā'sh-shajarah — "that tree". In the nineteenth verse it was hādhihi'sh-shajarah ("this tree"). Hādhā points to what is near, dhālika/tilka to what is far.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference of the two demonstratives: when the prohibition was laid down the tree was near; when the reckoning is asked for it is named as having grown distant. This is an observation about the word order; I draw no further conclusion from it.
قَالَا رَبَّنَا ظَلَمْنَآ أَنفُسَنَا وَإِن لَّمْ تَغْفِرْ لَنَا وَتَرْحَمْنَا لَنَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْخَٰسِرِينَ
"They said: 'Our Lord! We have wronged ourselves. If You do not forgive us and have mercy on us, we shall surely be among the lost.'"
The structure of this prayer was treated at 2/37 in al-Baqara, and three elements of it were counted there:
1. Taking the fault on oneself (without producing an excuse) 2. Producing no excuse 3. An unconditional request
And it was compared there with Iblīs's sentence: "Iblīs too spoke, but he gave a ground and laid the blame on God (al-Aʿrāf 7/16)." I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.
Further, in al-Baqara the expression talaqqā Ādamu min rabbihī kalimāt was treated, and it was recorded that "Adam does not find the words himself, he receives them; the door of repentance had already been left open". Al-Aʿrāf does not give this piece of information; in al-Aʿrāf the prayer itself comes directly. This is a countable difference between the two sūras.
The same sentence in Moses's mouth — a comparison with 28/16 in al-Qaṣaṣ
The same sentence occurs once more in the Qurʾān in the mouth of a prophet, and this comparison has been called for.
| Place | Who | Sentence | What follows |
|---|---|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/23 | Adam and his wife | Rabbanā ẓalamnā anfusanā | Wa in lam taghfir lanā wa tarḥamnā… |
| al-Qaṣaṣ 28/16 | Moses | Rabbi innī ẓalamtu nafsī fa'ghfir lī | Fa-ghafara lahū |
One — number. In al-Aʿrāf the sentence is dual (ẓalamnā anfusanā), in al-Qaṣaṣ singular (ẓalamtu nafsī). At 2/35-36 in al-Baqara it was recorded that the coming of the verbs in the dual distributes the responsibility; I rely on that treatment.
Two — the form of the request. Moses asks directly: fa'ghfir lī (imperative). Adam and his wife build a conditional clause: wa in lam taghfir lanā… la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīn — the request comes indirectly, by saying what will happen if forgiveness is withheld.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the grammatical structure of the two sentences: both prayers take the fault upon themselves; but one asks in the imperative, the other asks by stating the outcome. The second is more indirect, and a condition stands in between. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
Three — the answer. As was recorded at 28/16 in al-Qaṣaṣ, in al-Qaṣaṣ the answer is given at once in the same verse: fa-ghafara lahū. In al-Aʿrāf there is no such sentence. In al-Aʿrāf, in place of an answer, the command to go down comes (24).
I record this as an observation and rely on the table: al-Baqara 2/37 has an announcement of forgiveness that al-Aʿrāf does not have (fa-tāba ʿalayh); Ṭāhā 20/122 has one too (thumma'jtabāhu rabbuhū fa-tāba ʿalayhi wa hadā). Al-Aʿrāf does not give it.
| Sūra | Is the acceptance of repentance announced |
|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/37 | Yes — fa-tāba ʿalayhi innahū huwa't-tawwābu'r-raḥīm |
| Ṭāhā 20/122 | Yes — thumma'jtabāhu rabbuhū fa-tāba ʿalayhi wa hadā |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/23-24 | No — there is no sentence between the prayer and the command to go down |
This is a countable difference, and it does not break the frame recorded in al-Baqara — "the fall has been forgiven, it is not inherited, it is not a loss of standing but the beginning of a task" — because the announcement of that same event is expressly present in the other two sūras. The telling of al-Aʿrāf breaks off here and passes straight to the earth. I make no claim about the reason for this; I record only the datum.
The root خ-س-ر: diminution, loss. The root was treated in detail at 103/2 in al-ʿAṣr (inna'l-insāna la-fī khusr); I rely on that treatment.
And the same root had occurred in the ninth verse: fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum. There is an overlap between the two verses, and it must be recorded:
| Verse | Sentence | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/9 | Khasirū anfusahum | Those whose scales come out light |
| 7/23 | Ẓalamnā anfusanā … la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīn | Adam and his wife |
In both verses the same two words stand side by side: nafs and khusrān. And in both, the loss is inflicted not on another but on the person himself.
I record this as an observation: in the ninth verse this is a verdict (a finding delivered from outside); in the twenty-third it is a fear (from the person's own mouth). The same word, in two different mouths.
قَالَ ٱهْبِطُوا۟ بَعْضُكُمْ لِبَعْضٍ عَدُوٌّ وَلَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُسْتَقَرٌّ وَمَتَٰعٌ إِلَىٰ حِينٍ · قَالَ فِيهَا تَحْيَوْنَ وَفِيهَا تَمُوتُونَ وَمِنْهَا تُخْرَجُونَ
Qāla'hbiṭū baʿḍukum li-baʿḍin ʿaduww, wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn · Qāla fīhā taḥyawna wa fīhā tamūtūna wa minhā tukhrajūn
"He said: 'Go down, some of you an enemy to others. On the earth there is for you a place of settlement and provision for a time.' · He said: 'There you will live, there you will die, and from it you will be brought forth.'"
Both the twenty-fourth and the twenty-fifth verses begin with qāla, and there is no conjunction between them.
In Arabic, two qālas belonging to the same subject coming one after another without a conjunction is a construction worth recording. The lexicographers generally explain it as showing that the second speech is a separate, self-standing announcement, distinct from the first.
I record this as an observation: the first speech states the going down and the conditions of the going down; the second states the frame of life on the earth. The two are separate subjects, and the text too puts them into separate sentences.
| Verb | Meaning | Voice |
|---|---|---|
| Taḥyawna | You will live | Active |
| Tamūtūna | You will die | Active |
| Tukhrajūna | You will be brought forth | Passive |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the voice of the verbs: living and dying are built as man's own act; being brought forth as the act of another. That is, at the third step the subject changes.
And the same structure was built with three verbs at 20/55 in Ṭāhā: minhā khalaqnākum wa fīhā nuʿīdukum wa minhā nukhrijukum tāratan ukhrā. The two verses can be compared:
| Sūra | The three steps | Agent |
|---|---|---|
| Ṭāhā 20/55 | Khalaqnākum · nuʿīdukum · nukhrijukum | God in all three (the "We" form) |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/25 | Taḥyawna · tamūtūna · tukhrajūn | Two the human, the third passive |
I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts: Ṭāhā tells the event from the side of the one who does it, al-Aʿrāf from the side of the one who lives it. And al-Aʿrāf, by making its third verb passive, joins the two tellings.
| Word | Root | Meaning | Span |
|---|---|---|---|
| Mustaqarr | ق-ر-ر | The place where one settles | It states a place |
| Matāʿ | م-ت-ع | What is to be enjoyed | Ilā ḥīn — for a term |
The root م-ت-ع was undone at 47/12 in Muḥammad: enjoyment + "stretching on, continuing" (mataʿa'n-nahāru). I rely on that treatment.
Ilā ḥīn — "until a time". The root ح-ي-ن states an indefinite span. The same phrase occurs at 2/36 in al-Baqara as well (wa lakum fi'l-arḍi mustaqarrun wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn) — word for word the same sentence in the two sūras.
I record this as an observation: the verse gives two things — a place and a span. The limit of the place is not stated; the limit of the span is stated but its measure is not given. And the thirty-fourth verse will repeat the same matter for communities: wa li-kulli ummatin ajal.
When the story ends the sūra turns directly to the reader and calls out four times, yā banī Ādam. This address occurs five times in the Qurʾān; four of them are in al-Aʿrāf (26, 27, 31, 35), the fifth is at Yā Sīn 36/60.
| Verse | What comes after the address | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| 26 | Qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan… | Statement — the announcement of what is given |
| 27 | Lā yaftinannakumu'sh-shayṭān… | Prohibition |
| 31 | Khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjid… | Command |
| 35 | Immā yaʾtiyannakum rusulun minkum… | Condition |
Four of them in four different moods: statement, prohibition, command, condition. This is a countable order.
| Address | Its counterpart in the story |
|---|---|
| 26 — clothing | 22 — covering oneself with leaves |
| 27 — Satan's temptation | 20-22 — the whispering and the deception |
| 31 — adornment, eating, drinking | 19 — fa-kulā min ḥaythu shiʾtumā |
| 35 — the coming of messengers | 19 — wa lā taqrabā (the first announcement) |
يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ قَدْ أَنزَلْنَا عَلَيْكُمْ لِبَاسًا يُوَٰرِى سَوْءَٰتِكُمْ وَرِيشًا وَلِبَاسُ ٱلتَّقْوَىٰ ذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ ذَٰلِكَ مِنْ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَذَّكَّرُونَ
Yā banī Ādama qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum wa rīshā, wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayr, dhālika min āyāti'llāhi laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn
"O children of Adam! We have sent down upon you clothing to cover your shameful parts, and adornment as well. But the clothing of God-fearing is better. That is among the signs of God; perhaps they will take it to heart."
The root ل-ب-س and the likeness of libās were treated at 2/187 in al-Baqara (hunna libāsun lakum wa antum libāsun lahunn). I rely on that treatment. Five functions of clothing were counted there:
1. It covers — it does not show the flaw to the outside 2. It protects 3. It is the nearest thing — nothing stands in between 4. It adorns 5. It takes shape according to the wearer — it is not a ready-made mould
And the negative branch of the same root was recorded there too: talbīs at 2/42 — "to dress falsehood in the clothing of truth". The root states both covering and confusing.
What belongs here is this: al-Aʿrāf uses the word libās in three different senses within three verses.
| Verse | Expression | Which sense |
|---|---|---|
| 7/26 (a) | Libāsan yuwārī sawʾātikum | Physical clothing — that which covers |
| 7/26 (b) | Libāsu't-taqwā | Figurative — the clothing of God-fearing |
| 7/27 | Yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā | The covering of Adam and his wife — a return to the story |
Three uses, two verses. And if the fourth use in al-Baqara (spouses are clothing to one another) is added to these three, the four distinct works of the root in the Qurʾān are complete.
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the place the lexicographers have dwelt on: the verb used for clothing is anzalnā (We sent down).
Clothing does not come down from the sky. The Qurʾān uses the same verb elsewhere too for material things:
| Place | For what | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| al-Ḥadīd 57/25 | Iron | Wa anzalna'l-ḥadīd |
| al-Zumar 39/6 | Livestock | Wa anzala lakum mina'l-anʿāmi thamāniyata azwāj |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/26 | Clothing | Qad anzalnā ʿalaykum libāsā |
This usage was treated at 57/25 in al-Ḥadīd; I rely on that treatment. A summary of the explanations recorded there: the verb is also used in the sense "to be given as apportioned from a source", not "physical descent from above to below". The classical commentaries further transmit the explanation that "the raw material of clothing (plants that grow with the rain, the wool of animals) depends on water that comes from above". This is a transmitted explanation; I make no firm preference.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding: in the twenty-second verse the covering had been patched together by their own hands (yakhṣifāni); here the covering is sent down. The choice of the verb carries the difference between the two verses.
The concrete sense of the root: the feather of a bird. Rīsh is the feather and the wing of a bird. From this the senses of adornment, beauty, well-being, abundance of livelihood derive; when the Arabs said rāshahū they meant "he equipped him, he bettered his condition".
| Reading | Spelling | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| rīshā | رِيشًا | Feather, adornment — the widespread reading |
| riyāshā | رِيَاشًا | The plural of rīsh or "clothing, goods" |
The second reading is also transmitted; it does not change the meaning in any essential way (a plural, or the sense "wealth and clothing"). I do not impose a preference.
And the choice of the word is worth recording: a bird's feather covers, adorns and lifts into flight all at once. I give this as an observation and build no firm claim of meaning on it: the verse counts two things — that which covers (libāsan yuwārī) and that which adorns (rīshā). And in the thirty-second verse the lawfulness of adornment will be expressly defended (qul man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādih). That is, adornment is named in the twenty-sixth verse and defended in the thirty-second.
The root و-ق-ي: to guard, to be guarded. Taqwā is to take up a barrier that will guard a thing from harm. The root was treated at 2/2 in al-Baqara and in al-Layl; I rely on those treatments.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the root itself: libās covers and guards; taqwā guards too. That is, the likeness is built on the function the two words share. This is a datum of word order showing at which point the likeness works.
A point of word order: wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayr — the subject is named again by a demonstrative. In Arabic this serves for emphasis and for drawing attention: "the clothing of God-fearing — that is better."
And khayr here is an elative ("better"), and the side of the comparison is not stated. The sentence does not say "better than that"; it says only "better". I record this as an observation; what is understood from the context is the two garments named in the preceding sentence.
One further note: two readings are transmitted of the phrase libāsu't-taqwā — libās as nominative (subject) or as accusative (as the second object of anzalnā: "and We sent down the clothing of God-fearing too"). The second reading is also reported. I do not impose a preference; but one consequence of the second reading is worth recording: on that reading the clothing of God-fearing enters among the things "sent down".
A point of word order must be recorded: the verse begins in the second person plural (yā banī Ādam, ʿalaykum, sawʾātikum) and ends in the third person plural (laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn).
This is iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address), and it was treated in many places in the index (al-Fātiḥa, the sections of Yūnus; al-Shuʿarāʾ). I rely on those treatments.
I record this as an observation: while the address is "you", the judgement is delivered about "them". And the same shift was present in the third verse too (ittabiʿū… qalīlan mā tadhakkarūn — there it remained in the second person). Here it passes to the third person.
The verse divides dressing into two functions: covering and adorning. It counts both as lawful. Then it names a third thing and calls it "better".
What must be recorded is this: the verse does not exalt the third by rejecting the first two. All three are in the same sentence. And the thirty-second verse will expressly question the attitude that sets out to forbid adornment. When these two verses of the sūra are read together, what is given is not the rejection of adornment but its ordering. This is something that can be read off the arrangement of the two verses themselves.
يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ لَا يَفْتِنَنَّكُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ كَمَآ أَخْرَجَ أَبَوَيْكُم مِّنَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ يَنزِعُ عَنْهُمَا لِبَاسَهُمَا لِيُرِيَهُمَا سَوْءَٰتِهِمَآ إِنَّهُۥ يَرَىٰكُمْ هُوَ وَقَبِيلُهُۥ مِنْ حَيْثُ لَا تَرَوْنَهُمْ إِنَّا جَعَلْنَا ٱلشَّيَٰطِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ لِلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ
Yā banī Ādama lā yaftinannakumu'sh-shayṭānu kamā akhraja abawaykum mina'l-jannati yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā li-yuriyahumā sawʾātihimā, innahū yarākum huwa wa qabīluhū min ḥaythu lā tarawnahum, innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn
"O children of Adam! Let not Satan tempt you as he brought your parents out of the Garden, stripping from them their clothing to show them their shameful parts. He and his tribe see you from where you do not see them. We have made the satans the guardians of those who do not believe."
The root ن-ز-ع: to pull a thing out of the place where it stands, to strip it away. The root was treated at 79/1 in al-Nāziʿāt (wa'n-nāziʿāti gharqā) and at 3/26 in Āl ʿImrān (wa tanziʿu'l-mulk). I rely on those treatments.
| Verb | Mood | What it states |
|---|---|---|
| Akhraja | Perfect | He brought out — a finished act |
| Yanziʿu | Imperfect | Stripping — a state (a circumstantial clause) |
The imperfect coming here tells the event as though it were going on before one's eyes. In Arabic this is called ḥikāyat al-ḥāl: a past event is brought to life in the present tense.
I record this as an observation: the verse puts an event that happened in the past inside a warning that looks to the present — and the mood of the verb does the same work.
And the object of the verb must be recorded: libāsahumā. In the twenty-second verse the covering was told as being made afterwards (patching with leaves); here a libās is said to have been stripped away.
| Reading | What libās is |
|---|---|
| 1 | An actual covering — a garment that was upon them and was stripped away |
| 2 | The state of the sawʾāt being unseen — that is, "coveredness" is named as clothing |
The Qurʾān gives no detail on this. Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I do not add the detail the Qurʾān does not give.
The construction of the sentence must be recorded: the same verb (ر-أ-ي) twice, once affirmative and once negative, with the subjects exchanged.
And there is a disagreement of pronouns: innahū yarākum (singular) → lā tarawnahum (plural). This is explained by the intervening huwa wa qabīluhū: the sentence, beginning in the singular, passes to the plural once the tribe has been added. This is a datum of word order.
قَبِيل — the root ق-ب-ل: to be opposite, to face towards. Qabīl is "those who come together and face the same way" — a tribe, a company.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the one-sidedness of the verb of seeing: the verse states an asymmetry — one side sees, the other does not. And the thirtieth verse will state the consequence of this asymmetry: wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn — "and they suppose themselves to be rightly guided." Not seeing joins with not knowing that one does not see.
| Verse | Seeing | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/27 | Lā tarawnahum | Man — what he cannot see |
| 7/179 | Lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā | Man — what he does not see |
| 7/198 | Wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn | The idols — looking and not seeing |
Three verses, three different failures to see. The first an impossibility, the second a non-use, the third an absence. I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text.
The construction of the sentence must be recorded, and it must be compared with the thirtieth verse.
| Verse | Sentence | Agent |
|---|---|---|
| 7/27 | Innā jaʿalna'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn | God |
| 7/30 | Innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāh | Human beings |
The same relation is tied in two verses to two different agents: in 27 "We made", in 30 "they took".
This is a place that falls within a debate of kalām (the divine decree, the creation of acts), and no polemic of kalām is entered into in this commentary (Method). All I record is this: the text builds both sentences and does not resolve the relation between them. The two verses stand three verses apart and are given to the reader together.
And this datum of word order must be recorded: in the twenty-seventh verse the judgement is qualified as lilladhīna lā yuʾminūn (for those who do not believe) — that is, it is not general, it is tied to an attribute. Per the method (Method) I record that this is an attribute and not an identity (the same note was entered at 47/12 in Muḥammad).
وَإِذَا فَعَلُوا۟ فَٰحِشَةً قَالُوا۟ وَجَدْنَا عَلَيْهَآ ءَابَآءَنَا وَٱللَّهُ أَمَرَنَا بِهَا قُلْ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَأْمُرُ بِٱلْفَحْشَآءِ أَتَقُولُونَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ · قُلْ أَمَرَ رَبِّى بِٱلْقِسْطِ وَأَقِيمُوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ عِندَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ وَٱدْعُوهُ مُخْلِصِينَ لَهُ ٱلدِّينَ كَمَا بَدَأَكُمْ تَعُودُونَ · فَرِيقًا هَدَىٰ وَفَرِيقًا حَقَّ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةُ إِنَّهُمُ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ ٱلشَّيَٰطِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ وَيَحْسَبُونَ أَنَّهُم مُّهْتَدُونَ
Wa idhā faʿalū fāḥishatan qālū wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā wa'llāhu amaranā bihā, qul inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ, a-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn · Qul amara rabbī bi'l-qisṭ, wa aqīmū wujūhakum ʿinda kulli masjidin wa'dʿūhu mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn, kamā badaʾakum taʿūdūn · Farīqan hadā wa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalāla, innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāhi wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn
"When they commit an indecency they say, 'We found our forefathers upon it, and God commanded it of us.' Say: God does not command indecency. Do you say about God what you do not know? · Say: My Lord commanded justice. Set your faces towards Him at every place of prayer, and call upon Him, making the religion His alone. As He brought you forth in the beginning, so you will return. · One party He guided, and upon another party going astray became due. For they took the satans as guardians instead of God, and they suppose themselves to be rightly guided."
The twenty-eighth verse gives the two grounds of the addressee side by side, and the word order must be recorded:
| Order | Excuse | Its ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā | Tradition — the forefathers |
| 2 | Wa'llāhu amaranā bihā | Religion — the claim of a divine command |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the position of the answer: the first excuse (the forefathers) is dealt with elsewhere in the sūra (7/70 — wa nadhara mā kāna yaʿbudu ābāʾunā; 7/173 — innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu). What is answered here is the second excuse: the ascription of a behaviour to God.
| Step | Sentence | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ | It rejects the claim |
| 2 | A-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn | It names the kind of claim it is |
The expression in the second step must be recorded: mā lā taʿlamūn — "what you do not know". And the same expression will come back in the thirty-third verse as the last item in the list of what is forbidden: wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn.
| Verse | Sentence | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| 7/28 | A-taqūlūna ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn | A question |
| 7/33 | Wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn | An item in the list of what is forbidden |
The same expression five verses apart, one a question and one a ruling. This is a link that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be completed at verse 33.
The sense of the root: an indecency that exceeds the bound. The lexicographers explain fuḥsh as "an ugliness that exceeds the measure, in word or in deed". The word is not of sexual content alone; the root's own idea is the coming together of excess and ugliness.
And in this sūra the root occurs three times: 28 (fāḥishatan), 33 (al-fawāḥisha), 80 (a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥisha — Lot's question to his people).
| Pattern | Word | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| Form I | Qasaṭa | To do wrong, to swerve from the right |
| Form IV (ifʿāl) | Aqsaṭa | To do justice |
| Noun | Qisṭ | Justice, a share |
| Active participle | Qāsiṭ / muqsiṭ | Wrongdoer / the just |
That is, the same root gives two opposed senses according to the form. The lexicographers explain this by "the privative sense of Form IV": aqsaṭa = "to remove wrong". The root was treated at 55/9 in al-Raḥmān (wa aqīmu'l-wazna bi'l-qisṭ) and at 57/25 in al-Ḥadīd (li-yaqūma'n-nāsu bi'l-qisṭ). I rely on those treatments.
| Verse | The command claimed | The real command |
|---|---|---|
| 7/28 | Wa'llāhu amaranā bihā — indecency | — |
| 7/29 | — | Qul amara rabbī bi'l-qisṭ |
The same verb (أمر) stands facing itself in two verses: one a claim, the other an announcement. And the objects are opposites: fāḥisha (an indecency that exceeds the bound) ↔ qisṭ (that which is in its proper place).
A point of word order: ʿinda kulli masjid — "at every place of prayer". And the same phrase will be repeated in the thirty-first verse: khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjid.
The same adverbial two verses apart. I record this as an observation: both commands concern the place of prayer — one a turning towards, the other a preparing.
And the expression mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn must be recorded. The root خ-ل-ص: to be pure, unmixed. The distinction between mukhliṣ (active participle) and mukhlaṣ (passive participle) was tabulated at 38/83 in Ṣād; I rely on that treatment. Here mukhliṣīna is the active participle: the work the person does himself.
| Reading | The work of kamā | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | A likeness of manner | "As your creation was, so your raising will be" |
| 2 | A likeness of state | "As you were created (naked, alone, with nothing in your hands), so you will return" |
And the making of the first creation into a proof of the raising was treated in many places in the index (Yāsīn 36/79, al-Qiyāma 75/40, al-Rūm 30/27, al-Anbiyāʾ 21/104). I rely on those treatments.
| Side | Sentence | Agent |
|---|---|---|
| The first party | Farīqan hadā | God — expressly |
| The second party | Wa farīqan ḥaqqa ʿalayhimu'ḍ-ḍalāla | The agent is not stated — "going astray became due upon them" |
The two sides are not built symmetrically. In the first the verb is active and the agent plain (hadā — "He guided"); in the second the verb is ḥaqqa (became due) and its subject is al-ḍalāla, that is, it does not say "He led astray".
I record this as an observation, and it is a new link in a pattern treated in the index. Similar asymmetries were recorded in al-Zumar and al-Muddaththir. And no polemic of kalām is entered into in this commentary (Method); all I record is the datum of word order.
And the continuation of the verse shows that the condition of the second party is grounded in their own acts: innahumu'ttakhadhu'sh-shayāṭīna awliyāʾa min dūni'llāh — "for they took the satans as guardians."
| Place | Sentence |
|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/30 | Wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn |
| al-Kahf 18/104 | Wa hum yaḥsabūna annahum yuḥsinūna ṣunʿā (al-Kahf) |
| al-Mujādala 58/18 | Wa yaḥsabūna annahum ʿalā shayʾ (al-Mujādala) |
| al-Zukhruf 43/37 | Wa yaḥsabūna annahum muhtadūn (al-Zukhruf) |
Four places, the same verb (ح-س-ب) and the same structure. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them here.
What belongs here is this, and I give it as an observation: al-Aʿrāf and al-Zukhruf 43/37 are word for word the same sentence. And in al-Aʿrāf this sentence, read together with min ḥaythu lā tarawnahum ("from where you do not see them") in the twenty-seventh verse, forms a whole: not seeing, and supposing that one sees.
يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ خُذُوا۟ زِينَتَكُمْ عِندَ كُلِّ مَسْجِدٍ وَكُلُوا۟ وَٱشْرَبُوا۟ وَلَا تُسْرِفُوٓا۟ إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُسْرِفِينَ
Yā banī Ādama khudhū zīnatakum ʿinda kulli masjidin wa kulū wa'shrabū wa lā tusrifū, innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-musrifīn
"O children of Adam! Take your adornment at every place of prayer; eat and drink, but do not go to excess. He does not love those who go to excess."
The sense of the root: to adorn, to make beautiful. Zīna is what makes a thing look fair. The root was treated at 18/7 in al-Kahf (innā jaʿalnā mā ʿala'l-arḍi zīnatan lahā) and at 20/59 in Ṭāhā (yawmu'z-zīna). I rely on those treatments.
| Verse | Expression | What |
|---|---|---|
| 7/31 | Khudhū zīnatakum | Command |
| 7/32 | Man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādih | Defence |
| 7/26 | Wa rīshā | The same idea, with a different word |
Al-Aʿrāf 7/31 is added to this line as a new link, and its difference must be recorded:
| Place | The subject of the measure | Are both extremes given |
|---|---|---|
| al-Furqān 25/67 | Spending (anfaqū) | Yes — isrāf and iqtār |
| Luqmān 31/19 | Gait and voice | Yes — waqṣid (the middle) |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/31 | Eating and drinking | No — only one extreme: lā tusrifū |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/29 | The hand | Yes — maghlūlatan / kulla'l-basṭ |
In al-Aʿrāf only one extreme is forbidden. And the reason for this becomes visible in the next verse: verse 32 will deal separately with the other extreme (setting out to forbid). That is, the two extremes have been divided between two verses. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the two verses.
The root س-ر-ف: to exceed the bound, to lose the measure. The lexicographers record that the word carries not only the sense "to spend much" but also "not to use a thing in its place". The root was treated at 20/127 in Ṭāhā (man asrafa wa lam yuʾmin) and at 40/28 and 40/43 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin). I rely on those treatments.
| Verse | Expression | About whom |
|---|---|---|
| 7/31 | Wa lā tusrifū … al-musrifīn | The addressee |
| 7/81 | Bal antum qawmun musrifūn | The people of Lot |
I record this as an observation: the sūra uses the same word both for the measure of eating and drinking and for the conduct of Lot's people. The shared idea of the word is "exceeding the bound", and that idea is at work in both places. I draw no equivalence between the two behaviours from this; all I record is the shared root and the shared idea of the word.
A point of word order must be recorded: the pronoun innahū refers back to God, whose name is not expressly mentioned in the preceding sentences.
The name "God" does not occur in the verse. It will come in the thirty-second verse: zīnata'llāh. That is, the pronoun rests on the expression amara rabbī several verses earlier (29).
And the pattern lā yuḥibbu must be recorded. In the Qurʾān this pattern is a particular way of rejecting a behaviour, and it was treated in the index (al-Baqara 2/190 — inna'llāha lā yuḥibbu'l-muʿtadīn; Luqmān 31/18 — lā yuḥibbu kulla mukhtālin fakhūr). I rely on those treatments.
Both are in the same pattern, and both end with a word that carries the idea of "exceeding the bound" (isrāf and iʿtidāʾ). One concerns eating and drinking, the other supplication. This is an overlap that can be verified from the text.
The verse gives three commands and one prohibition: take, eat, drink — but do not exceed. The commands are three times the number of the prohibition.
What must be recorded is this, and it can be read off the word order: the prohibition comes after the commands and sets a limit within them; it does not cancel them. And the next verse will question the attitude that sets out to turn this limit into a prohibition.
قُلْ مَنْ حَرَّمَ زِينَةَ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّتِىٓ أَخْرَجَ لِعِبَادِهِۦ وَٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ مِنَ ٱلرِّزْقِ قُلْ هِىَ لِلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا خَالِصَةً يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ كَذَٰلِكَ نُفَصِّلُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لِقَوْمٍ يَعْلَمُونَ
Qul man ḥarrama zīnata'llāhi'llatī akhraja li-ʿibādihī wa'ṭ-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq, qul hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma, kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn
"Say: Who has forbidden the adornment God has brought forth for His servants, and the good things of provision? Say: These are for those who believe, in the life of this world; on the Day of Resurrection they will be theirs alone. Thus do We set out the signs in detail for a people who know."
A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence is a question opening with a command (qul), and the question is built with man (who).
In Arabic this pattern — man ḥarrama… — is a rhetorical question of denial (istifhām inkārī): no answer is expected, the question is itself a rejection. "Who has forbidden it?" = "No one has forbidden it."
And the verse contains two quls: one for the question, one for the answer. That is, it makes the messenger utter both the question and the answer.
I record this as an observation: in the twenty-eighth verse the other side ascribed something to God (wa'llāhu amaranā bihā); here the other side ascribes a prohibition to God. The two verses show the same error in two directions: presenting something as God's command, and presenting something as God's prohibition.
| Verse | What is ascribed | Answer |
|---|---|---|
| 7/28 | A command — to indecency | Inna'llāha lā yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾ |
| 7/32 | A prohibition — of adornment and good provision | Man ḥarrama… |
| 7/33 | — | Innamā ḥarrama rabbiya… — the real list |
The sense of the root: to be pleasant, clean, good. Ṭayyib is used in the sense "both agreeable to the senses and harmless". The root was treated at 2/168 in al-Baqara (kulū mimmā fi'l-arḍi ḥalālan ṭayyibā); I rely on that treatment.
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 7/32 | Wa'ṭ-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq |
| 7/58 | Wa'l-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib — the good land |
| 7/157 | Wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāti wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾith |
Three occurrences: provision, land, what is made lawful. And in the hundred and fifty-seventh verse the word comes together with its opposite (khabāʾith — foul things), just as ṭayyib meets khabutha in verse 58.
The answering sentence (qul hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma) has been read differently among the lexicographers. The disagreement is given in a table; I do not impose a preference.
| Reading | The division of the sentence | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Hiya lilladhīna āmanū fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā · khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma | "These are for those who believe in the life of this world (others share in them too), and on the Day of Resurrection theirs alone" |
| 2 | Hiya lilladhīna āmanū · fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā khāliṣatan yawma'l-qiyāma | "These are for those who believe: in this world (shared), and in the hereafter unmixed" |
Both readings are transmitted and both come close to the same result: in this world the bounty is shared, in the hereafter it is not. I do not impose a preference.
| Reading | Spelling | Case |
|---|---|---|
| khāliṣatan | خَالِصَةً | Accusative — circumstantial |
| khāliṣatun | خَالِصَةٌ | Nominative — predicate |
The root خ-ل-ص had occurred in the twenty-ninth verse as mukhliṣīna lahu'd-dīn. The same root two verses apart: one the servant's making the religion unmixed, the other the bounty's being unmixed. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
The verse says that to hold a thing forbidden is also a claim. The twenty-eighth verse asked for the ground of saying "God commanded this"; the thirty-second asks for the ground of saying "God forbade this".
No legal ruling is issued in this commentary (Method). All I record is the verse's own construction: the question asks for the source of the prohibition.
قُلْ إِنَّمَا حَرَّمَ رَبِّىَ ٱلْفَوَٰحِشَ مَا ظَهَرَ مِنْهَا وَمَا بَطَنَ وَٱلْإِثْمَ وَٱلْبَغْىَ بِغَيْرِ ٱلْحَقِّ وَأَن تُشْرِكُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ مَا لَمْ يُنَزِّلْ بِهِۦ سُلْطَٰنًا وَأَن تَقُولُوا۟ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
Qul innamā ḥarrama rabbiya'l-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭan, wa'l-ithma wa'l-baghya bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq, wa an tushrikū bi'llāhi mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānan, wa an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn
"Say: My Lord has forbidden only these: indecencies, open and hidden; sin; wrongful transgression; that you associate with God that for which He has sent down no warrant; and that you say about God what you do not know."
This verse gives a list, and per the method (Method) no legal ruling is built here. What I shall do is to work out how many items the list has and what those items are.
A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with innamā — the particle of restriction (ḥaṣr) in Arabic: "He has forbidden only these."
| # | Item | Arabic | Group |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Indecencies — open and hidden | Al-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭan | Deed |
| 2 | Sin | Al-ithm | Deed |
| 3 | Wrongful transgression | Al-baghya bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq | Deed |
| 4 | Association — associating without warrant | An tushrikū bi'llāhi mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānā | Speech/belief |
| 5 | Ascribing to God what one does not know | An taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn | Speech |
The division of the two groups can be read off the word order and must be recorded: the first three items come as nouns (with the definite article: al-fawāḥish, al-ithm, al-baghy); the last two come with an + verb (an tushrikū, an taqūlū). That is, the first three are things, the last two are acts.
أ-ث-م — ithm: the root carries the idea of "lagging behind, being late"; the lexicographers explain ithm as "an act that holds its doer back from good". The root was treated at 2/219 in al-Baqara (fīhimā ithmun kabīr), where the variant reading kabīr/kathīr was recorded. I rely on that treatment.
ب-غ-ي — baghy: the concrete sense of the root is "to exceed, to overflow"; a wound that festers is also said to baghā'l-jurḥ. From this comes the sense "to exceed the bound, to do wrong". And the same root occurs twice more in this sūra: at 45 and 86 (wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā — "they seek to make it crooked").
And the qualification bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq must be recorded. A point of word order: of the three items, a qualification is placed only on baghy. The lexicographers give two explanations of this:
| Explanation | Ground |
|---|---|
| 1 | For emphasis — baghy is already wrongdoing, and the qualification reinforces it |
| 2 | To distinguish — the firmness shown in recovering a right does not count as baghy |
The root س-ل-ط: to prevail, to have mastery. Sulṭān is generally used in the Qurʾān in the sense "proof, evidence, warrant" — because a proof is what gives mastery in a dispute.
And the same phrase will occur in this sūra in the seventy-first verse, in the mouth of Hūd: a-tujādilūnanī fī asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān.
| Verse | Who says it | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 7/33 | The command (qul) | Mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānā |
| 7/71 | Hūd | Mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān |
I record this as an observation: the sūra applies in the seventy-first verse, in the mouth of a prophet, the measure it laid down in the thirty-third. The same technique was tabulated in Hūd Table 4; I rely on that treatment.
The last item of the list is word for word the same expression as the question in the twenty-eighth verse.
And its being placed last in the list must be recorded. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the arrangement of the three verses:
In the twenty-eighth verse the other side ascribed an indecency to God; in the thirty-second it ascribed a prohibition to God. The thirty-third verse makes that very act the last item of the list. That is, the list ends with an item that takes in the list itself: if "saying what is forbidden on God's authority" enters the list, then adding to the list falls under that item too.
وَلِكُلِّ أُمَّةٍ أَجَلٌ فَإِذَا جَآءَ أَجَلُهُمْ لَا يَسْتَأْخِرُونَ سَاعَةً وَلَا يَسْتَقْدِمُونَ
"Every community has its term. When their term comes, they cannot delay it by an hour, nor bring it forward."
A point of word order must be recorded: the verse comes immediately after the list (33) and immediately before the address yā banī Ādam (35).
I record this as an observation: once the list of what is forbidden is finished, an announcement of a term comes directly. And in the twenty-fourth verse the term of the individual was named (wa matāʿun ilā ḥīn); here that of the community is named.
| Verb | Root | The sense of the form |
|---|---|---|
| Yastaʾkhirūn | أ-خ-ر | To seek delay / to be delayed |
| Yastaqdimūn | ق-د-م | To seek to go forward / to go forward |
| Reading | Meaning |
|---|---|
| 1 | Form X is here for seeking: "even if they seek it, they are not delayed" |
| 2 | Form X here has the sense of the bare verb: "they neither lag behind nor go forward" |
And the structure of the sentence must be recorded: both directions are closed at once — it neither goes back nor forward. This is a pattern repeated in the Qurʾān's announcements of the term (Yūnus 10/49, al-Naḥl 16/61, al-Muʾminūn 23/43, al-Munāfiqūn 63/11). It was treated in al-Naḥl and al-Munāfiqūn; I rely on those treatments.
Sāʿatan — "an hour, a moment" — comes indefinite, and an indefinite in a context of negation covers the smallest quantity: "not even a moment".
يَٰبَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ إِمَّا يَأْتِيَنَّكُمْ رُسُلٌ مِّنكُمْ يَقُصُّونَ عَلَيْكُمْ ءَايَٰتِى فَمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ وَأَصْلَحَ فَلَا خَوْفٌ عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا هُمْ يَحْزَنُونَ · وَٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا وَٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ عَنْهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ
Yā banī Ādama immā yaʾtiyannakum rusulun minkum yaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī, fa-mani'ttaqā wa aṣlaḥa fa-lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn · Wa'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa'stakbarū ʿanhā ulāʾika aṣḥābu'n-nāri hum fīhā khālidūn
"O children of Adam! If messengers come to you from among yourselves, recounting My signs to you — whoever guards himself and sets himself right, no fear shall be upon them and they shall not grieve. · But those who called Our signs lies and were too great for them, those are the people of the Fire; they will remain in it."
A point of word order must be recorded: immā is in fact in (the conditional) + mā (redundant), and the verb has taken the emphatic nūn (yaʾtiyanna).
In Arabic, adding mā to the conditional in and giving the verb the emphatic nūn is a construction implying that the condition will certainly come to pass.
And the same pattern occurred at al-Baqara 2/38: fa-immā yaʾtiyannakum minnī hudā. It was treated at 2/38 in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment. The ring closing back to al-Fātiḥa was recorded there.
| Place | What comes | For whom |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/38 | Hudā — guidance | Adam and his offspring |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/35 | Rusulun minkum — messengers from among yourselves | The children of Adam |
Al-Baqara says "if guidance comes", al-Aʿrāf "if messengers come". The same pattern, two different agents. I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the two texts.
And the qualification minkum must be recorded: the messengers will be "from among you". The same emphasis will be repeated twice in the sequence of prophets in this sūra: ʿalā rajulin minkum (63, Noah) and ʿalā rajulin minkum (69, Hūd). The same note in three places.
What belongs here is this: the same pattern occurs twice in this sūra, and the second is in the section on the people of al-Aʿrāf.
| Verse | Sentence | For whom |
|---|---|---|
| 7/35 | Fa-lā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn | Those who guard themselves and set themselves right |
| 7/49 | Lā khawfun ʿalaykum wa lā antum taḥzanūn | Those told to enter the Garden |
The first is in the third person, the second in the second person — that is, at 49 the word is said directly to the addressee. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be taken up again at 46-49.
The protasis of the conditional clause is two verbs: ittaqā (he guarded himself) and aṣlaḥa (he set right).
The root ص-ل-ح: the going away of a defect, becoming useful and fit. The verb here is of Form IV (aṣlaḥa) and is transitive; its object is not stated.
I record this as an observation: the verse does not say "he set himself right" or "he set his affair right"; it leaves the object open. And the same root occurs seven times in this sūra, the four most striking being these:
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/56 | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | A command |
| 7/85 | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | Shuʿayb |
| 7/142 | Ukhlufnī fī qawmī wa aṣliḥ | Moses → Aaron (Hārūn) |
| 7/170 | Innā lā nuḍīʿu ajra'l-muṣliḥīn | Those who hold fast to the Book |
This block is one of the most detailed dialogues of the gathering in the Qurʾān, and it contains five separate turns of speech:
| Turn | Who → whom | Verse |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The angels → those who are dying | 37 |
| 2 | Those who came later ↔ those who came first | 38-39 |
| 3 | The people of the Garden → the people of the Fire, then a crier | 44-45 |
| 4 | The people of al-Aʿrāf → both sides at once | 46-49 |
| 5 | The people of the Fire → the people of the Garden | 50-51 |
فَمَنْ أَظْلَمُ مِمَّنِ ٱفْتَرَىٰ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ كَذِبًا أَوْ كَذَّبَ بِـَٔايَٰتِهِۦٓ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَنَالُهُمْ نَصِيبُهُم مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا جَآءَتْهُمْ رُسُلُنَا يَتَوَفَّوْنَهُمْ قَالُوٓا۟ أَيْنَ مَا كُنتُمْ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ قَالُوا۟ ضَلُّوا۟ عَنَّا وَشَهِدُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ أَنَّهُمْ كَانُوا۟ كَٰفِرِينَ
Fa-man aẓlamu mimmani'ftarā ʿala'llāhi kadhiban aw kadhdhaba bi-āyātih, ulāʾika yanāluhum naṣībuhum mina'l-kitāb, ḥattā idhā jāʾathum rusulunā yatawaffawnahum qālū ayna mā kuntum tadʿūna min dūni'llāh, qālū ḍallū ʿannā wa shahidū ʿalā anfusihim annahum kānū kāfirīn
"Who is more wrongdoing than one who invents a lie against God or calls His signs lies? Their share of the Book reaches them. Then, when Our messengers come to take their souls, they say, 'Where are those you used to call upon beside God?' They say, 'They have gone astray from us,' and they bear witness against themselves that they were deniers."
This pattern occurs in close to fifteen places in the Qurʾān and was treated in the index (al-Kahf 18/57, al-Sajda 32/22, al-Zumar 39/32). I rely on those treatments.
| Verb | What | Direction |
|---|---|---|
| Iftarā ʿala'llāhi kadhiban | To invent a lie against God | Addition — to say what is not |
| Kadhdhaba bi-āyātih | To call His signs lies | Subtraction — to reject what is |
I record this as an observation: the two acts run in opposite directions — one adds, the other subtracts. And the last item of the thirty-third verse (an taqūlū ʿala'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn) corresponds to the first act. That is, there are four verses between the list and this verse, and the same act is named twice.
| Reading | What kitāb is | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The preserved tablet / what is decreed | "The share written for them reaches them" — lifespan, provision, term |
| 2 | The Book sent down | "The share announced for them in the Book reaches them" — the recompense promised |
A point of word order: yanāluhum naṣībuhum — the verb is nāla (ن-ي-ل), "to reach". And the same root will return in the forty-ninth verse: lā yanāluhumu'llāhu bi-raḥma. Two occurrences: one the reaching of a share, the other the not reaching of mercy.
Rusul here are not messengers (prophets) but those charged with taking the soul — this is understood from the context and from the verb (yatawaffawnahum). The same usage is present at al-Anʿām 6/61 too (tawaffathu rusulunā).
The root و-ف-ي: to be complete, to render in full. Tawaffā is "to take a thing in full" — hence "to take the soul". The root was treated at 39/42 in al-Zumar (Allāhu yatawaffa'l-anfus); I rely on that treatment.
The construction of the sentence must be recorded: shahidū ʿalā anfusihim — "they bore witness against themselves".
And the same structure will return in the hundred and seventy-second verse — but there the direction differs:
| Verse | Sentence | When | For what |
|---|---|---|---|
| 7/37 | Wa shahidū ʿalā anfusihim annahum kānū kāfirīn | At the moment of death | Against themselves |
| 7/172 | Wa ashhadahum ʿalā anfusihim a-lastu bi-rabbikum | At the beginning | An acknowledgement |
There are a hundred and thirty-five verses between the two, and both use the structure shahida ʿalā nafsih.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the shared word order of the two verses: the sūra makes man a witness about himself twice — once at the beginning (172), once at the end (37). And the two testimonies face one another: the first an acknowledgement, the second a confession. This will be completed at 172-174.
قَالَ ٱدْخُلُوا۟ فِىٓ أُمَمٍ قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِكُم مِّنَ ٱلْجِنِّ وَٱلْإِنسِ فِى ٱلنَّارِ كُلَّمَا دَخَلَتْ أُمَّةٌ لَّعَنَتْ أُخْتَهَا حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا ٱدَّارَكُوا۟ فِيهَا جَمِيعًا قَالَتْ أُخْرَىٰهُمْ لِأُولَىٰهُمْ رَبَّنَا هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ أَضَلُّونَا فَـَٔاتِهِمْ عَذَابًا ضِعْفًا مِّنَ ٱلنَّارِ قَالَ لِكُلٍّ ضِعْفٌ وَلَٰكِن لَّا تَعْلَمُونَ · وَقَالَتْ أُولَىٰهُمْ لِأُخْرَىٰهُمْ فَمَا كَانَ لَكُمْ عَلَيْنَا مِن فَضْلٍ فَذُوقُوا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَكْسِبُونَ
Qāla'dkhulū fī umamin qad khalat min qablikum mina'l-jinni wa'l-insi fi'n-nār, kullamā dakhalat ummatun laʿanat ukhtahā, ḥattā idha'ddārakū fīhā jamīʿan qālat ukhrāhum li-ūlāhum rabbanā hāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā fa-ātihim ʿadhāban ḍiʿfan mina'n-nār, qāla li-kullin ḍiʿfun wa lākin lā taʿlamūn · Wa qālat ūlāhum li-ukhrāhum fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍlin fa-dhūqu'l-ʿadhāba bimā kuntum taksibūn
"He says: 'Enter the Fire among communities of jinn and men that have passed away before you.' Every time a community enters, it curses its fellow. Then, when they have all caught up with one another there, the last of them will say of the first: 'Our Lord! These led us astray; give them a double punishment of the Fire.' He says: 'For each there is double, but you do not know.' · And the first of them will say to the last: 'You have no advantage over us; taste then the punishment for what you earned.'"
A point of word order must be recorded: the verse does not say "it curses the one before it", it says "ukhtahā" — "its sister".
In Arabic a thing's like, one of the same kind, is called its ukht (hādhihi ukhtu hādhih — "this is the like of this"). The word states not kinship but likeness.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the word: the side cursed is the like of the side that curses. And the thirty-ninth verse will say this outright: fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍl — "you have no advantage over us."
The sense of the root: to catch up, to reach, to overtake. Iddāraku is originally tadāraku (Form VI); the tāʾ has been assimilated into the dāl. Form VI states reciprocity: "they caught up with one another".
And the same root was treated at 27/66 in al-Naml (bali'ddāraka ʿilmuhum fi'l-ākhira); I rely on that treatment.
| Who | To whom | What it says |
|---|---|---|
| The last (ukhrāhum) | Of the first (ūlāhum) | Hāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā — these led us astray; give them double punishment |
| God | — | Li-kullin ḍiʿfun — for each there is double |
| The first (ūlāhum) | To the last (ukhrāhum) | Fa-mā kāna lakum ʿalaynā min faḍl — you have no advantage |
And the form of the answer must be recorded: the request was "give them double"; the answer becomes "for everyone there is double".
Wa lākin lā taʿlamūn — "but you do not know." That is, the one who makes the request does not know that what he asks for takes him in as well.
I record this as an observation: in the scene a transfer of responsibility is attempted and refused. And the same attempt will be repeated in the hundred and seventy-third verse of the sūra: innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim, a-fa-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala'l-mubṭilūn. The two scenes do the same work: laying the load on the past.
| Verse | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 7/38 | Those who came later | Hāʾulāʾi aḍallūnā |
| 7/173 | Those who came later | Innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu |
The root ض-ع-ف carries both the sense "weakness" and the sense "fold, multiple". Ḍiʿf means "as much again of a thing"; it is understood as "double" or as "many times over".
The lexicographers have disagreed over the exactness of the quantity; I build no claim about a number. What I record is that the answer corrects not the quantity but the distribution: li-kullin — "for each".
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا وَٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ عَنْهَا لَا تُفَتَّحُ لَهُمْ أَبْوَٰبُ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَلَا يَدْخُلُونَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ حَتَّىٰ يَلِجَ ٱلْجَمَلُ فِى سَمِّ ٱلْخِيَاطِ وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلْمُجْرِمِينَ · لَهُم مِّن جَهَنَّمَ مِهَادٌ وَمِن فَوْقِهِمْ غَوَاشٍ وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
Inna'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa'stakbarū ʿanhā lā tufattaḥu lahum abwābu's-samāʾi wa lā yadkhulūna'l-jannata ḥattā yalija'l-jamalu fī sammi'l-khiyāṭ, wa kadhālika najzi'l-mujrimīn · Lahum min jahannama mihādun wa min fawqihim ghawāsh, wa kadhālika najzi'ẓ-ẓālimīn
"As for those who called Our signs lies and were too great for them: the gates of heaven will not be opened for them, and they will not enter the Garden until the camel passes through the eye of the needle. Thus do We recompense the guilty. · For them there is a bed of Hell and coverings above them. Thus do We recompense the wrongdoers."
A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is the passive of Form II (tufattaḥu), not tuftaḥu. Form II here carries the sense of multiplicity and of one by one: "the gates are not opened one by one."
| Verse | Sentence | What is opened |
|---|---|---|
| 7/40 | Lā tufattaḥu lahum abwābu's-samāʾ | The gates of heaven — not opened |
| 7/96 | La-fataḥnā ʿalayhim barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍ | Blessings — opened |
The same root (ف-ت-ح), in two directions. And verse 96 is the counterpart of this passage: there, on the condition of faith and God-fearing, blessings will be opened from heaven and earth. I record this as an observation, and the two verses can be verified from the text.
Two readings are transmitted about what the expression "the gates of heaven are not opened" refers to:
| Reading | What is not opened |
|---|---|
| 1 | To their souls — their ascent when their souls are taken |
| 2 | To their deeds / their prayers — their not being accepted |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And the Qurʾān gives no detail here; I invent no detail.
Ḥattā here means "until", and in Arabic, used together with a condition impossible of fulfilment, it gives the sense "never". This is a known pattern in the language (taʿlīq bi'l-muḥāl).
The root و-ل-ج: to enter a narrow place. Wulūj is "to be thrust inside". The root was treated in Luqmān 31/29 and al-Ḥadīd 57/6 (yūliju'l-layla fi'n-nahār), where the sense "to pass one thing inside another" was recorded. I rely on those treatments.
I record this as an observation: the choice of the verb is worth recording — not yadkhulu (to enter) but yaliju (to be thrust into a narrow place). That is, the verb already carries narrowness, and it joins with the narrowness of the hole.
The root س-م-م was undone at 52/27 in al-Ṭūr (ʿadhāba's-samūm) and at 56/42 in al-Wāqiʿa. I rely on those treatments. A summary of what was recorded there:
- The root carries two branches: pore/hole, and poison.
- Samūm is "the scorching hot wind that works into the pores".
- Masāmm — the pores of the body; the relation with samm (poison) was conveyed as a relation drawn by the lexicographers, not as a settled etymological ruling.
What belongs here is this: the same root comes here with its first branch. Sammu'l-khiyāṭ — "the hole of the needle".
| Place | Word | Which branch of the root |
|---|---|---|
| al-Ṭūr 52/27 · al-Wāqiʿa 56/42 | Samūm | The heat that works into the pores |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/40 | Samm | The hole — the eye of the needle |
The root خ-ي-ط: to sew. Khiyāṭ is the sewing needle; khayṭ is thread. And the same root occurs at al-Baqara 2/187: al-khayṭu'l-abyaḍu mina'l-khayṭi'l-aswad — "the white thread, the black thread". It was treated at 2/187 in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment.
I record this as an observation, and the two verses can be verified from the text: the same root gives the thread in al-Baqara and the needle in al-Aʿrāf. Both come from the picture of sewing.
| Reading | Spelling | Meaning | Its root |
|---|---|---|---|
| al-jamal | ٱلْجَمَل | Camel — the male camel | ج-م-ل |
| al-jummal | ٱلْجُمَّل | Ship's cable — a thick twisted rope | ج-م-ل |
| al-jumal | ٱلْجُمَل | The same — cable (on another pattern) | ج-م-ل |
| al-juml | ٱلْجُمْل | The same — cable | ج-م-ل |
The widespread reading, transmitted by mass transmission, is the first: al-jamal — camel. The other readings have been transmitted and are held to be anomalous (shādhdh). I do not impose a preference; both have been transmitted.
| Reading | How the likeness works |
|---|---|
| Jamal (camel) | Two extremes: the largest animal and the smallest hole — a difference of kind |
| Jummal (cable) | Of the same kind: thread and cable, both belonging to sewing — a difference of degree |
I record this as an observation: the second reading has an inner consistency — needle and cable are the two ends of one work (sewing); thread passes through the needle, a cable does not. But the first reading is both the widespread one and the one transmitted by mass transmission, and it builds the likeness more sharply. I do not impose a preference.
One further note: the lexicographers record that the words jamal and jummal are from the same root (ج-م-ل: to gather together, to amass — jumla, ijmāl are from the same root). A cable is threads twisted together; and the camel is the animal that gathers up a load and carries it. This is a relation drawn by the lexicographers; I do not give it as a settled etymological ruling.
| Word | Root | Meaning | Direction |
|---|---|---|---|
| Mihād | م-ه-د | A mattress, a bed spread out | Below |
| Ghawāsh | غ-ش-و | Coverings, things drawn over | Above |
The root م-ه-د was treated at 20/53 in Ṭāhā (jaʿala lakumu'l-arḍa mahdā) and at 78/6 in al-Nabaʾ (a-lam najʿali'l-arḍa mihādā). I rely on those treatments. And the difference must be recorded: there the mihād was the earth's being spread out for man; here it is Hell's being spread out.
The root غ-ش-و: to cover, to envelop. The root was treated in al-Ghāshiya (al-ghāshiya) and at 45/23 in al-Jāthiya (ghishāwatan). I rely on those treatments. And the same root will occur in the fifty-fourth verse of this sūra: yughshi'l-layla'n-nahār.
I record this as an observation: the verse counts below and above — and these were exactly the two directions Iblīs did not count in the seventeenth verse (fawq and taḥt). There is an overlap between the two verses, and I give it as a possible reading, not as a certainty.
A point of word order must be recorded: both verses end with the same pattern but with a different word.
The root ج-ر-م: to cut, to sever — hence jurm, "the evil act one earns". The root ظ-ل-م: to put a thing somewhere other than its place (treated at 8-9).
The two words come one after another and name the same group by two different attributes. This accords with the sūra's manner, sustained from the beginning, of defining by attribute (Method: "it is the attributes the verse describes").
وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ لَا نُكَلِّفُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلْجَنَّةِ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ · وَنَزَعْنَا مَا فِى صُدُورِهِم مِّنْ غِلٍّ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهِمُ ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ وَقَالُوا۟ ٱلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ ٱلَّذِى هَدَىٰنَا لِهَٰذَا وَمَا كُنَّا لِنَهْتَدِىَ لَوْلَآ أَنْ هَدَىٰنَا ٱللَّهُ لَقَدْ جَآءَتْ رُسُلُ رَبِّنَا بِٱلْحَقِّ وَنُودُوٓا۟ أَن تِلْكُمُ ٱلْجَنَّةُ أُورِثْتُمُوهَا بِمَا كُنتُمْ تَعْمَلُونَ
Wa'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāti lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā ulāʾika aṣḥābu'l-jannati hum fīhā khālidūn · Wa nazaʿnā mā fī ṣudūrihim min ghillin tajrī min taḥtihimu'l-anhār, wa qālu'l-ḥamdu li'llāhi'lladhī hadānā li-hādhā wa mā kunnā li-nahtadiya lawlā an hadāna'llāh, laqad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq, wa nūdū an tilkumu'l-jannatu ūrithtumūhā bimā kuntum taʿmalūn
"Those who believe and do righteous deeds — We charge no soul beyond its capacity — those are the people of the Garden; they will remain in it. · We have pulled out whatever rancour was in their breasts. Rivers run beneath them. They say: 'Praise be to God, who guided us to this. We would never have found the way had God not guided us. The messengers of our Lord did come with the truth.' And they are called to: 'This is the Garden you have been made to inherit for what you used to do.'"
A point of word order must be recorded, and it is striking: the sentence lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā comes in between the subject (wa'lladhīna āmanū wa ʿamilu'ṣ-ṣāliḥāt) and its predicate (ulāʾika aṣḥābu'l-janna).
This is a construction seen in the second verse too (there fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minh had come in between two parts). In both places the intervening sentence is an announcement that lightens a load.
| Verse | The intervening sentence | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 7/2 | Fa-lā yakun fī ṣadrika ḥarajun minh | It lightens the messenger's load |
| 7/42 | Lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā | It limits the addressee's load |
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two sentences stand in the same position of word order.
Wusʿ — the root و-س-ع: breadth. Wusʿ is "a person's breadth", that is, his capacity. The same sentence occurs at al-Baqara 2/286 (lā yukallifu'llāhu nafsan illā wusʿahā) and was treated in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment.
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 7/42 | Illā wusʿahā — capacity |
| 7/89 | Wasiʿa rabbunā kulla shayʾin ʿilmā — in Shuʿayb's mouth |
| 7/156 | Wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ |
The root ن-ز-ع was treated at the twenty-seventh verse (yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā). And the same verb comes back here.
| Verse | What was pulled out | From whom |
|---|---|---|
| 7/27 | Libāsahumā — their clothing | From Adam and his wife — by Satan |
| 7/43 | Mā fī ṣudūrihim min ghill — the rancour in their breasts | From the people of the Garden — by God |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two occurrences of the verb: the same verb is in one place the taking away of a covering, in the other the taking away of a burden. One a loss, the other a gain.
The root غ-ل-ل: a thing's seeping in between, entering secretly. Ghill is "rancour that has seeped into the breast"; from the same root come ghull (the ring or fetter put on the neck) and ghulūl (secretly filching from the spoils).
And the other branch of the root will occur in the hundred and fifty-seventh verse of this sūra: wa'l-aghlāla'llatī kānat ʿalayhim — "the fetters that were upon them".
| Verse | Word | Branch of the root |
|---|---|---|
| 7/43 | Ghill | Rancour — what seeps inward |
| 7/157 | Al-aghlāl | The fetter — what is put on the neck |
Two words from one root, and both carry the idea of a binding. And both are lifted: one in the Garden (nazaʿnā), the other by the messenger (wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum). This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.
A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence contains the lām of denial (lām al-juḥūd) — mā kunnā li-nahtadiya.
In Arabic the pattern mā kāna + li- + imperfect states negation in its strongest form: "it was not a thing that could be, there was no possibility of it." This pattern was treated in al-Shuʿarāʾ and in the sections of Yūnus.
And it is akin to the pattern mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara in the thirty-third verse — there too an impossibility was being stated.
I record this as an observation: the first sentence of the people of the Garden is a praise, the second a withdrawal of themselves. And the third is the confirmation of the messengers' truthfulness (laqad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq). Three sentences: thanks, humility, confirmation.
The root و-ر-ث: to come into an inheritance. The verb here is passive: "you have been made to inherit it."
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/43 | Ūrithtumūhā | The people of the Garden |
| 7/100 | Alladhīna yarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihā | Those who inherit the earth |
| 7/128 | Inna'l-arḍa li'llāhi yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādih | Moses's word to his people |
| 7/137 | Wa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūna mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribahā | Those who had been made weak |
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence ends with bimā kuntum taʿmalūn — "for what you used to do." In the same verse, "you were made to inherit" (a giving without return) and "for what you used to do" (a giving in return) stand side by side. I record this as an observation; the text joins the two and does not resolve the relation between them.
وَنَادَىٰٓ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلنَّارِ أَن قَدْ وَجَدْنَا مَا وَعَدَنَا رَبُّنَا حَقًّا فَهَلْ وَجَدتُّم مَّا وَعَدَ رَبُّكُمْ حَقًّا قَالُوا۟ نَعَمْ فَأَذَّنَ مُؤَذِّنٌۢ بَيْنَهُمْ أَن لَّعْنَةُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَى ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ · ٱلَّذِينَ يَصُدُّونَ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَيَبْغُونَهَا عِوَجًا وَهُم بِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ كَٰفِرُونَ
Wa nādā aṣḥābu'l-jannati aṣḥāba'n-nāri an qad wajadnā mā waʿadanā rabbunā ḥaqqan fa-hal wajadtum mā waʿada rabbukum ḥaqqā, qālū naʿam, fa-adhdhana muʾadhdhinun baynahum an laʿnatu'llāhi ʿala'ẓ-ẓālimīn · Alladhīna yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajan wa hum bi'l-ākhirati kāfirūn
"The people of the Garden call out to the people of the Fire: 'We have found what our Lord promised us to be true. Have you found what your Lord promised you to be true?' They say, 'Yes.' Then a crier calls out among them: 'The curse of God be upon the wrongdoers!' · Those who bar others from the way of God and seek to make it crooked, and who deny the hereafter."
A point of word order must be recorded: the question is built so as to carry its own answer within it.
The same verb (و-ج-د), the same specifying accusative (ḥaqqan), two different subjects. And the answer is a single word: naʿam — "yes".
I record this as an observation: there is no argument in the scene. The other side does not object; it confirms. And this looks to the same place as shahidū ʿalā anfusihim in the thirty-seventh verse: the admission comes from the other side.
| Verse | Who called | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 7/44 | The people of the Garden | To the people of the Fire |
| 7/46 | The people of al-Aʿrāf | To the people of the Garden |
| 7/48 | The people of al-Aʿrāf | To the men they recognised |
| 7/50 | The people of the Fire | To the people of the Garden |
Four calls, three different parties. And the people of al-Aʿrāf call out twice — the group that gives the sūra its name is the group that speaks most in the block. This is a countable datum.
The root أ-ذ-ن: ear (udhun), and from this to announce, to proclaim (adhān). Muʾadhdhin is "one who announces".
A point of word order must be recorded: muʾadhdhin comes indefinite — "a crier". Who he is is not stated.
I record this as an observation, and I do not add the detail the Qurʾān does not give: explanations of who this crier is are transmitted in the classical commentaries; none of them can be verified from the text, and none is certain knowledge. I content myself with transmitting them.
And baynahum — "among them" — must be recorded: the crier is not on either of the two sides, but between them. And two verses later "a veil between them" (wa baynahumā ḥijāb) will be named. There is an overlap between the two expressions; but I give it not as a certainty, only as a possible reading.
The root ع-و-ج was treated at 39/28 in al-Zumar (ghayra dhī ʿiwaj) and at 18/1 in al-Kahf (wa lam yajʿal lahū ʿiwajā). I rely on those treatments. The distinction recorded there: ʿiwaj is crookedness that is not seen, ʿawaj crookedness that is seen.
| Verse | Sentence | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/45 | Yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā | The description of the wrongdoers |
| 7/86 | Wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi man āmana bihī wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajā | The notables of Madyan |
The two sentences use exactly the same verbs: ṣadda and baghā … ʿiwajan. One a general description, the other a concrete community.
I record this as an observation, and the table can be verified from the text: the sūra applies in the eighty-sixth verse to a people the description it gave in the forty-fifth. And this is the third instance in al-Aʿrāf of the technique tabulated in Hūd Table 4 (the others: lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā 56→85, and mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānan 33→71).
| Sentence | The general announcement | Its application in the sequence of prophets |
|---|---|---|
| Mā (lam) yunazzil bihī sulṭān | 7/33 — the list of what is forbidden | 7/71 — Hūd |
| Lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | 7/56 — a direct command | 7/85 — Shuʿayb |
| Yaṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā | 7/45 — the description of the wrongdoers | 7/86 — Madyan |
| La-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm | 7/16 — Iblīs's threat | 7/86 — lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭ |
Four rows. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the eight verses themselves: al-Aʿrāf applies in the sequence of prophets the measures it set up in the first fifty-eight verses. And three of the four applications are in the story of Shuʿayb (85, 86, 86).
7/46-49 — The people of al-Aʿrāf
وَبَيْنَهُمَا حِجَابٌ وَعَلَى ٱلْأَعْرَافِ رِجَالٌ يَعْرِفُونَ كُلًّۢا بِسِيمَىٰهُمْ وَنَادَوْا۟ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَن سَلَٰمٌ عَلَيْكُمْ لَمْ يَدْخُلُوهَا وَهُمْ يَطْمَعُونَ · وَإِذَا صُرِفَتْ أَبْصَٰرُهُمْ تِلْقَآءَ أَصْحَٰبِ ٱلنَّارِ قَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَا لَا تَجْعَلْنَا مَعَ ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
Wa baynahumā ḥijāb, wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum, wa nādaw aṣḥāba'l-jannati an salāmun ʿalaykum, lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn · Wa idhā ṣurifat abṣāruhum tilqāʾa aṣḥābi'n-nāri qālū rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn
"Between the two there is a veil. And upon al-Aʿrāf are men who recognise each by his mark. They call out to the people of the Garden: 'Peace be upon you.' They have not entered it, but they hope to. · And when their eyes are turned towards the people of the Fire they say: 'Our Lord! Do not place us with the wrongdoing people.'"
| Branch | Meaning | Derivatives |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Height, ridge | ʿUrf (a horse's mane, a cockerel's comb), aʿrāf (plural) |
| 2 | To know, to recognise | Maʿrifa, ʿārif, yaʿrifūna, maʿrūf |
And the verse itself uses the two branches side by side: wa ʿala'l-aʿrāfi rijālun yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verse's own words: the same root occurs in the same sentence both as a place-name and as a verb. This is not a play on sounds or numbers but the presence of the root's two branches in one sentence — and therefore it is not a reckoning of the kind Method forbids.
And the word maʿrūf will occur twice in this sūra: wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf (199) and yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūf (157). The same root, in the name of the sūra and in two commands.
This is a place where the classical commentaries divide. I give the disagreement in a table and do not impose a preference.
| View | What al-Aʿrāf is | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The high part, the crest, of the wall between the Garden and the Fire | The root sense of the word (ʿurf = ridge, height); its being read together with wa baynahumā ḥijāb in the verse |
| 2 | A high place / a summit, a station from which both sides are seen | The same root sense; the calling out to both sides in verses 46-49 |
| 3 | Derived from maʿrifa, "the place of recognising" | The second branch of the root; the sentence yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum |
The first and second views are close to one another, and the majority stands here. The third is also transmitted. I do not impose a preference.
A "wall" (sūr) is named in one other place in the Qurʾān: al-Ḥadīd 57/13 — fa-ḍuriba baynahum bi-sūrin lahū bābun bāṭinuhū fīhi'r-raḥmatu wa ẓāhiruhū min qibalihi'l-ʿadhāb. It was treated at 57/13 in al-Ḥadīd. In the classical commentaries the two verses are read together; but that the two texts describe the same thing is not said by the Qurʾān. I give this as a possible link, not as a certainty.
This is a more detailed disagreement, and at least five views are transmitted in the classical commentaries. I give them in a table and I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE.
| # | View | Ground (from the text) | Its difficulty |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Those whose good and evil come out equal | Lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn — they have not yet entered but they hope; their fear in 47 of being with the wrongdoers | The word "equality" (istiwāʾ) is not in the text; a link has to be made with the weighing in verses 8-9 |
| 2 | Prophets, martyrs, or persons of high rank | Yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum — that they recognise everyone; their addressing the proud in 48 | On this view the sentence lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn must be read not of "the people of al-Aʿrāf" but of the people of the Garden |
| 3 | Angels | That they recognise everyone; that they can address both sides | The word rijāl (men); and that a waiting (yaṭmaʿūn) is stated in 46 |
| 4 | A group held back, on whom judgement has not yet been passed | Lam yadkhulūhā wa hum yaṭmaʿūn; their being told udkhulu'l-janna in 49 | Being held back is not named as a verdict in the text |
| 5 | A company on whom judgement has been passed but whose station is separate | ʿAla'l-aʿrāf — that they stand in a place apart | The text does not say the reason for this separateness |
| Reading | Subject | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| A | The people of al-Aʿrāf | "They (the people of al-Aʿrāf) have not entered the Garden, but they hope to" |
| B | The people of the Garden (named in 44) — the sentence, as a circumstantial clause, looks to the state before the words of the people of al-Aʿrāf | "While they (the people of the Garden) had not yet entered, the people of al-Aʿrāf greeted them" |
The second reading is less widespread but has been voiced by the lexicographers. I do not impose a preference.
| Reading | Speaker | Addressee |
|---|---|---|
| A | The people of al-Aʿrāf | To the believers who had been made weak — after addressing the proud in 48 |
| B | God / a crier | To the people of al-Aʿrāf — that is, their waiting comes to an end |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The second reading is the ground of the fourth view (those held back).
What I must record is this, and I write it plainly: the Qurʾān does not say who the people of al-Aʿrāf are. All the views above are readings drawn from the text. I make no preference, I invent no report, and I give no personal names (Method).
The lexicographers disagree about the root of the word sīmā, and this was recorded at 48/29 in al-Fatḥ: و-س-م (to brand; wasm, sima) or س-و-م. I rely on that treatment and issue no settled ruling on the root.
| Place | The note |
|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/273 | Taʿrifuhum bi-sīmāhum — "recognising them requires not an investigation but an attentiveness"; the bearers of the mark are not aware that they carry it |
| al-Fatḥ 48/29 | A four-line table of the disagreement (light/gravity, humility, a physical trace, a sign of the resurrection), with no preference; sīmā is what another reads, not what its bearer displays |
And at 55/41 in al-Raḥmān the other direction of the word was recorded: yuʿrafu'l-mujrimūna bi-sīmāhum — the guilty too are recognised by their marks. That is, the word works in both directions.
What belongs here is this: al-Aʿrāf 7/46 and 7/48 are the only place where the word is used in both directions at once.
| Verse | Sentence | Who is recognised |
|---|---|---|
| 7/46 | Yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum | Everyone — both sides at once |
| 7/48 | Yaʿrifūnahum bi-sīmāhum | Particular persons — the proud |
The kullan of the forty-sixth verse is indefinite and means "each one": both the people of the Garden and the people of the Fire.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word kullan: the distinguishing attribute of the people of al-Aʿrāf is that they can recognise both sides at once. And this accords with the picture of the place where they stand (a height): one who stands on a height sees both flanks. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The root ط-م-ع: the desire to obtain a thing, hope. The word will occur again in the fifty-sixth verse in the form ṭamaʿan (wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā).
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 7/46 | Wa hum yaṭmaʿūn | The people of al-Aʿrāf |
| 7/56 | Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | The addressee |
And there is an overlap between the two verses: in the forty-seventh verse, when the eyes of the people of al-Aʿrāf are turned towards the people of the Fire, they utter a sentence of fear (rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn), and in the forty-sixth, while they look towards the Garden, they carry a hope (yaṭmaʿūn).
That is, verses forty-six and forty-seven together describe the state of khawf and ṭamaʿ — and the fifty-sixth verse gives those same two words as a command.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two verses. The pair khawfan wa ṭamaʿan was treated at 30/24 in al-Rūm and at 32/16 in al-Sajda; those treatments will be relied on at 7/56.
A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is passive — ṣurifat ("were turned"), not ṣarafū ("they turned").
The root ص-ر-ف: to turn a thing from one direction to another. And the same root will occur in the hundred and forty-sixth verse: sa-aṣrifu ʿan āyātiya'lladhīna yatakabbarūn.
I record this as an observation: the gaze turns towards the people of the Fire not by their own will but by being turned — and what they see makes them utter a prayer. The text does not say the subject of the turning.
وَنَادَىٰٓ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلْجَنَّةِ أَنْ أَفِيضُوا۟ عَلَيْنَا مِنَ ٱلْمَآءِ أَوْ مِمَّا رَزَقَكُمُ ٱللَّهُ قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ حَرَّمَهُمَا عَلَى ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ · ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ دِينَهُمْ لَهْوًا وَلَعِبًا وَغَرَّتْهُمُ ٱلْحَيَوٰةُ ٱلدُّنْيَا فَٱلْيَوْمَ نَنسَىٰهُمْ كَمَا نَسُوا۟ لِقَآءَ يَوْمِهِمْ هَٰذَا
Wa nādā aṣḥābu'n-nāri aṣḥāba'l-jannati an afīḍū ʿalaynā mina'l-māʾi aw mimmā razaqakumu'llāh, qālū inna'llāha ḥarramahumā ʿala'l-kāfirīn · Alladhīna'ttakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿiban wa gharrathumu'l-ḥayātu'd-dunyā, fa'l-yawma nansāhum kamā nasū liqāʾa yawmihim hādhā wa mā kānū bi-āyātinā yajḥadūn
"The people of the Fire call out to the people of the Garden: 'Pour down on us some water, or some of what God has provided you.' They say: 'God has forbidden both to the deniers.' · Those who took their religion as a diversion and a game, and whom the life of this world deluded. So today We forget them — just as they forgot the meeting of this day of theirs, and as they used knowingly to deny Our signs."
In this section nidāʾ (calling out) occurs four times, and all four come from a different direction. This is a countable datum:
| # | Verse | Who calls | Addressee | What is said |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 44 | The people of the Garden | The people of the Fire | Qad wajadnā mā waʿadanā rabbunā ḥaqqā — a question of confirmation |
| 2 | 46 | The people of al-Aʿrāf | The people of the Garden | Salāmun ʿalaykum — a greeting |
| 3 | 48 | The people of al-Aʿrāf | Those who were proud | Mā aghnā ʿankum jamʿukum — a question of reckoning |
| 4 | 50 | The people of the Fire | The people of the Garden | Afīḍū ʿalaynā — a request |
Four calls, three different parties. And the direction of the sequence is worth recording: the first three come from above downwards or from the side, the fourth from below upwards.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the subjects of the four verses: through the section the speech is not one-directional. But one thing never changes: in no call does the addressee give the caller what he asks. In the forty-fourth verse the answer is "yes", but a curse follows it; in the fiftieth the answer is a flat refusal.
The root ف-ي-ض: a vessel filling and overflowing, the flowing of what overflows. Fāḍa'l-māʾu — the water overflowed. Afāḍa (Form IV) — to make overflow, to make flow, to pour.
The choice of the word is worth recording, and this is an observation about word order: what is asked for is not "give us" (aʿṭūnā) but "pour down on us". That is, the request rests on the assumption that what is to be given is abundant — a portion is asked of something that is overflowing.
And the same root is used in the Qurʾān in the passage on the pilgrimage too (thumma afīḍū min ḥaythu afāḍa'n-nās — al-Baqara 2/199) — there the pouring of people from a place is described. The picture in the root is the same in both: a mass in flow.
The construction of the answer must be recorded: the people of the Garden do not say "we will not give". They are not the subject of the sentence: inna'llāha ḥarramahumā — the one who has forbidden is God.
I record this as an observation about word order: the refusal is given not as a personal stance but as the announcement of a ruling. And this accords with the forty-third verse: there the ghill (rancour) had been pulled out of the breasts of the people of the Garden. In the mouth of a company from whom rancour has been removed, a refusal can only be built this way.
And the pronoun humā (the two of them) must be recorded: two things were asked for — water and provision; and the refusal covers both at once.
The root ل-ه-و: to be diverted, to be occupied with what keeps one from the real business. The root ل-ع-ب: play, an unserious occupation.
The lexicographers give the difference between the two words thus: laʿib is an occupation aimless in itself, while lahw is what keeps a person from his real business. That is, one looks to the act itself, the other to its outcome.
And the word order must be recorded: ittakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿibā — what is abandoned is not the religion; the religion itself has been turned into a game.
| What could have been said | What is said |
|---|---|
| Tarakū dīnahum — they abandoned their religion | Ittakhadhū dīnahum lahwan wa laʿibā — they took their religion as a diversion and a game |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the object of the verb: the verse describes not the abandonment of religion but its being kept in hand and emptied of content. The religion stands where it was; its function has changed.
And this is the same pattern recorded in many places in al-Baqara: the form is preserved, the function is emptied. I rely on those treatments.
The same phrase can be compared once more with the passage on zīna treated at the thirty-first verse: there, what had been made lawful was held forbidden; here, what is serious is turned into a game. Two errors, in opposite directions.
And in ascribing the verb to God a note of tanzīh is needed. This note was entered at 9/67 in al-Tawba (nasu'llāha fa-nasiyahum), and I rely on it: the Qurʾān itself says wa mā kāna rabbuka nasiyyā (Maryam 19/64). For this reason nansāhum here is explained, by the shared note of the lexicographers and the exegetes, by the second sense of the root — to leave aside, not to attend to, not to take into account. I do not repeat it here.
What belongs here is the name of what was forgotten: liqāʾa yawmihim hādhā — "the meeting of this day of theirs". That is, what was forgotten is not a piece of information but an appointment.
وَلَقَدْ جِئْنَٰهُم بِكِتَٰبٍ فَصَّلْنَٰهُ عَلَىٰ عِلْمٍ هُدًى وَرَحْمَةً لِّقَوْمٍ يُؤْمِنُونَ · هَلْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَّا تَأْوِيلَهُۥ يَوْمَ يَأْتِى تَأْوِيلُهُۥ يَقُولُ ٱلَّذِينَ نَسُوهُ مِن قَبْلُ قَدْ جَآءَتْ رُسُلُ رَبِّنَا بِٱلْحَقِّ فَهَل لَّنَا مِن شُفَعَآءَ فَيَشْفَعُوا۟ لَنَآ أَوْ نُرَدُّ فَنَعْمَلَ غَيْرَ ٱلَّذِى كُنَّا نَعْمَلُ
Wa laqad jiʾnāhum bi-kitābin faṣṣalnāhu ʿalā ʿilmin hudan wa raḥmatan li-qawmin yuʾminūn · Hal yanẓurūna illā taʾwīlah, yawma yaʾtī taʾwīluhū yaqūlu'lladhīna nasūhu min qablu qad jāʾat rusulu rabbinā bi'l-ḥaqq, fa-hal lanā min shufaʿāʾa fa-yashfaʿū lanā aw nuraddu fa-naʿmala ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmal, qad khasirū anfusahum wa ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn
"We brought them a Book which We set out in detail upon knowledge — a guidance and a mercy for a people who believe. · Are they waiting for anything but its outcome? On the day its outcome comes, those who forgot it before will say: 'The messengers of our Lord did come with the truth. Have we now any intercessors to intercede for us? Or could we be sent back, that we might do other than what we used to do?' They have lost themselves, and what they used to invent has gone astray from them."
The root ف-ص-ل: to separate two things from one another; to set a division. Faṣl — separating. Form II (faṣṣala) states multiplicity: to separate piece by piece, to set out in detail.
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 32 | Kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn |
| 52 | Bi-kitābin faṣṣalnāhu ʿalā ʿilm |
| 145 | Wa katabnā lahū fi'l-alwāḥi min kulli shayʾin mawʿiẓatan wa tafṣīlan li-kulli shayʾ |
| 174 | Wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn |
Three of the four occurrences are for this Book, one for the tablets given to Moses. That is, the sūra ascribes the same verb to two Books. I record this as an observation.
عَلَىٰ عِلْمٍ — "upon a knowledge". The particle ʿalā: the ground on which the work of setting out in detail rests is stated. And this is the same word as fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilmin in the sixth and seventh verses. The sūra ties both the recounting and the setting out in detail to the same word.
The root أ-و-ل: the place to which a thing returns, the end it reaches. Āla ilayh — it returned to it, it came to it. Taʾwīl is the place where a word or an event comes out in the end — that is, the announcement in its realised form.
This differs from the sense "interpretation" that the word acquired later, and here the verse itself says which it means: yawma yaʾtī taʾwīluh — the taʾwīl "comes". What comes is not an interpretation but an event.
| # | Request | What is asked |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Hal lanā min shufaʿāʾa fa-yashfaʿū lanā | An intermediary — that the sentence be lightened from outside |
| 2 | Aw nuraddu fa-naʿmala ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmal | A return — that the work be done again from the start |
And the order of the two requests is worth recording: first the intermediary, then their own hand. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order: what comes to mind first is not putting right what one did oneself, but someone's stepping in between.
This second request is recorded elsewhere in the Qurʾān as well, and each time it goes unanswered (al-Anʿām 6/27-28; al-Muʾminūn 23/99-100 — treated in al-Muʾminūn). I rely on those treatments.
إِنَّ رَبَّكُمُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضَ فِى سِتَّةِ أَيَّامٍ ثُمَّ ٱسْتَوَىٰ عَلَى ٱلْعَرْشِ يُغْشِى ٱلَّيْلَ ٱلنَّهَارَ يَطْلُبُهُۥ حَثِيثًا وَٱلشَّمْسَ وَٱلْقَمَرَ وَٱلنُّجُومَ مُسَخَّرَٰتٍۭ بِأَمْرِهِۦٓ أَلَا لَهُ ٱلْخَلْقُ وَٱلْأَمْرُ تَبَارَكَ ٱللَّهُ رَبُّ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
Inna rabbakumu'llāhu'lladhī khalaqa's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa fī sittati ayyāmin thumma'stawā ʿala'l-ʿarsh, yughshi'l-layla'n-nahāra yaṭlubuhū ḥathīthā, wa'sh-shamsa wa'l-qamara wa'n-nujūma musakhkharātin bi-amrih, alā lahu'l-khalqu wa'l-amr, tabāraka'llāhu rabbu'l-ʿālamīn
"Your Lord is God, who created the heavens and the earth in six days, then mounted the Throne. He covers the day with the night — the night pursues it swiftly. And the sun, the moon and the stars are made subservient by His command. His alone are the creating and the command. Blessed is God, the Lord of all the worlds!"
This verse opens the fifth block of the sūra (54-58), and what opens the block is a change of address. Up to the fifty-third verse the scene was in the hereafter; the fifty-fourth turns directly to the addressee: inna rabbakum.
I record this as an observation about word order: the scene of the hereafter closes with ḍalla ʿanhum mā kānū yaftarūn — what was invented disappears. Immediately afterwards comes the description of the real Lord. The place that has been emptied is filled.
This expression was treated in the index at 50/38 in Qāf and at 41/9-12 in Fuṣṣilat. I rely on those treatments and keep both notes here too:
One — the note at 50/38 in Qāf: the word ي-و-م in Arabic does not mean only "a twenty-four-hour day"; the primary sense of the root is a stretch of time, a period. How long the six "days" lasted is not stated and is not known.
Two — the note at 41/9-12 in Fuṣṣilat: modern cosmology is not dressed onto these verses; the days are not equated with geological ages. Such an equation would be to make the text say what it does not say (Method).
| Place | What comes after sittati ayyām |
|---|---|
| Qāf 50/38 | Wa mā massanā min lughūb — the negation of weariness |
| Fuṣṣilat 41/9-12 | A detailed accounting of the days and dhālika taqdīru'l-ʿazīzi'l-ʿalīm |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/54 | Istiwāʾ, and after it the scene of night and day |
Three sūras tie the same expression to three different places: one to power, one to measure, one to governance. I record this as an observation.
Per the method (Method) I enter a note about this phrase, and I do not open the debate.
At 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) the note kept consistently throughout the index for expressions concerning the Throne was entered, and I rely on it: these expressions cannot be understood so as to ascribe place, body or movement to God. Two chief attitudes are transmitted in the classical commentaries for verses of this kind:
| Attitude | What is done |
|---|---|
| Tafwīḍ | The wording is accepted as it stands, and its modality is referred to God |
| Taʾwīl | It is interpreted in the sense of sovereignty and disposal |
I convey both and impose no preference. The same note was entered at 32/4 in al-Sajda and at 20/5 in Ṭāhā; the shared principle is al-Shūrā 42/11. I do not repeat it, and I enter into no polemic of kalām (Method).
What belongs here is only a datum of the text, and it was counted at 20/5 in Ṭāhā: the phrase occurs in seven places in the Qurʾān — al-Aʿrāf 7/54, Yūnus 10/3, al-Raʿd 13/2, Ṭāhā 20/5, al-Furqān 25/59, al-Sajda 32/4, al-Ḥadīd 57/4. This verse is the first of those seven.
The Qurʾān tells of night and day following one another with several different pictures. Two of them were treated in the index; this is the third, and I compare the three in a table:
| Place | Verb | Root | Picture |
|---|---|---|---|
| Luqmān 31/29 (and al-Ḥadīd 57/6) | Yūliju'l-layla fi'n-nahāri wa yūliju'n-nahāra fi'l-layl | و-ل-ج | To pass one inside the other — each is thrust into the other |
| al-Zumar 39/5 | Yukawwiru'l-layla ʿala'n-nahāri wa yukawwiru'n-nahāra ʿala'l-layl | ك-و-ر | To wind over — as a turban is wound, each over the other |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/54 | Yughshi'l-layla'n-nahāra yaṭlubuhū ḥathīthā | غ-ش-و + ط-ل-ب | To cover and to pursue — one covers the other over, running after it |
- و-ل-ج — to enter through a narrow place. Wulūj — entry. Picture: passing one within the other.
- ك-و-ر — to wind a thing by folding. Kawr — the winding of a turban. Picture: winding over.
- غ-ش-و — to cover a thing over, to overspread. Ghishāwa — the film that comes over the eye (it occurred at 45/23 in al-Jāthiya). Picture: closing over the top.
- ط-ل-ب — to seek, to look for, to go after. Picture: coming from behind.
حَثِيثًا — the root ح-ث-ث: to urge on, to go continuously and fast. Ḥaththa — he drove without stopping, he urged on. Ḥathīth means "without any halt and fast". The word in this pattern occurs only here in the Qurʾān; this is a countable datum.
And the difference of the three pictures is worth recording. I give this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete senses of the three roots:
| Luqmān 31/29 | al-Zumar 39/5 | al-Aʿrāf 7/54 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Kind of relation | Interpenetration | Winding | Pursuit |
| Is it reciprocal | Yes — two-directional | Yes — two-directional | No — one-directional |
| Is speed stated | No | No | Yes — ḥathīthā |
The third row is what belongs to al-Aʿrāf alone: only here is there a note of speed, and only here is the movement one-directional.
And this accords with the rest of the sūra — I give this as a reading: al-Aʿrāf is the sūra that tells of something that comes in haste. In the fourth verse the destruction had come bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn (by night or in the noon sleep); in the thirty-fourth the term was not delayed by even an hour. The ḥathīthā of the fifty-fourth verse is the picture of the same line on the scale of the universe.
On the connection with natural science I draw the limit: no conclusion about planetary motion, rotational speed or the terminator line is to be drawn from this. The verse builds the picture of an observation: on the horizon, darkness coming swiftly after light. This is a fact everyone sees with his own eyes, and it is what the verse uses (Method).
And the closing of the verse must be recorded: alā lahu'l-khalqu wa'l-amr. Two words are set side by side, and both had occurred within the verse:
| Word | Where it occurred in the verse |
|---|---|
| Khalq | Khalaqa's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ — at the beginning |
| Amr | Musakhkharātin bi-amrih — at the end |
That is, the closing sentence gathers the verse's own two halves. I record this as an observation about word order.
And the lexicographers give the difference of the two words thus: khalq is to bring into being, amr is to govern what has been brought into being. The sentence ties both at once to the same place — and this is the ground of what will be repeated in the later sections of the sūra: the one who creates is the one who lays down the ruling (see 7/32, 7/33, 7/70).
تَبَارَكَ — the root ب-ر-ك: a thing's being fixed and lasting; and from this, blessing, increasing good. The pattern is Form VI, and the lexicographers give here the sense "the fixedness of loftiness and abundance". The word will occur once more in this sūra, at the ninety-sixth verse, in the form barakāt.
ٱدْعُوا۟ رَبَّكُمْ تَضَرُّعًا وَخُفْيَةً إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُعْتَدِينَ · وَلَا تُفْسِدُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ بَعْدَ إِصْلَٰحِهَا وَٱدْعُوهُ خَوْفًا وَطَمَعًا إِنَّ رَحْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ قَرِيبٌ مِّنَ ٱلْمُحْسِنِينَ
Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufya, innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-muʿtadīn · Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā, inna raḥmata'llāhi qarībun mina'l-muḥsinīn
"Call upon your Lord in humility and in secret. He does not love those who exceed the bounds. · Do not work corruption on the earth after it has been set in order. Call upon Him in fear and in hope. The mercy of God is near to those who do good."
The fifty-fourth verse had stated who the Lord is; the fifty-fifth says how He is to be called upon. The order is worth recording: first the description, then the manner of address.
The root ض-ر-ع: weakness, submission, being brought low. Ḍariʿ — weak, without strength. Form V (taḍarruʿ) states a person's putting himself into that condition: to lower oneself, to plead.
| Word | What it looks to |
|---|---|
| Taḍarruʿan | The inward state — holding oneself small |
| Khufyatan | The outward state — the voice not being heard |
And this pair will overlap with one of the last verses of the sūra. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra:
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 7/55 | Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan |
| 7/205 | Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl |
In both verses the same word (taḍarruʿ), and in both a note about the voice. The difference: at 55 khufya (secrecy), at 205 khīfa (fear). That is, where the sūra opens the command to pray and where it closes it, it presses on the same two axes: lowering oneself, and voice. I record this as my own reading; its ground is the words of the two verses.
And a question of word order must be recorded: exceeding the bound in what does the sentence forbid? Two readings are transmitted in the classical commentaries, and I give the disagreement in a table:
| Reading | Where the iʿtidāʾ is | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | In supplication — exceeding the bound while praying (shouting, asking for what cannot be, demanding what is not one's own) | That the sentence comes immediately after the supplication; that the qualification taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan is setting a measure |
| 2 | In general — exceeding the bound in every field | That the sentence is left without an object; that the word al-muʿtadīn comes unrestricted |
Both readings are transmitted. I do not impose a preference. And the two do not exclude each other: the next verse already moves out of supplication and on to the earth.
This sentence occurs twice in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form — 56 and 85 — and its second occurrence is in the mouth of Shuʿayb. This repetition was tabulated in the section on the structure of the sūra; I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.
| Verse | Command | Field |
|---|---|---|
| 55 | Udʿū rabbakum | Vertical — the servant towards his Lord |
| 56a | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍ | Horizontal — the servant towards the earth |
| 56b | Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | Vertical — supplication again |
That is, the command about the earth has been placed between two commands about supplication. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the order of the three sentences.
بَعْدَ إِصْلَٰحِهَا — "after it has been set in order". What must be recorded is this: the sentence presupposes a prior condition. The earth is named not as a neutral ground but as a ground that has been set right. Corruption is described not as adding something to a void but as breaking an order that exists.
Who set it right is not stated, and several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries for this gap (the order in creation; the order the messengers brought; both at once). The text does not name it; nor do I make a preference.
| Place | Expression | Whose state |
|---|---|---|
| al-Rūm 30/24 | Yurīkumu'l-barqa khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | The state of one who looks at lightning — fear of the bolt, hope of rain |
| al-Raʿd 13/12 | Yurīkumu'l-barqa khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | The same scene — treated on the basis of al-Rūm |
| al-Sajda 32/16 | Yadʿūna rabbahum khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | The state of one who prays |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/56 | Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | A command — the one who prays is commanded |
And what al-Aʿrāf adds must be recorded, and it is a datum of the text: in al-Rūm and al-Raʿd the pair is the description of an observation, in al-Sajda the attribute of a company, and in al-Aʿrāf a direct command.
That is, the same pair occurs in the index first as a fact, then as an attribute, and here as a demand. I record this as an observation.
And within the sūra this pair has a precedent — it was treated at the forty-sixth and forty-seventh verses: the people of al-Aʿrāf, looking towards the Garden, were yaṭmaʿūn (hoping), and looking towards the Fire were saying rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn (fearing). The fifty-sixth verse turns the state described there into a command. This link was recorded at 46-47; here it closes.
A point of word order must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: raḥma is a feminine word, but its predicate comes as qarībun — masculine. The expected form would be qarībatun.
The lexicographers give several explanations, and I convey all of them as transmitted, imposing no preference:
| # | Explanation |
|---|---|
| 1 | Raḥma here is grammatically feminine only (it states no real femininity); the predicate of such words may come masculine |
| 2 | Qarīb is used here not as an adjective but as an adverbial — in the sense "in a near place"; adverbials do not take the feminine |
| 3 | Raḥma stands in place of a masculine word of like meaning such as raḥm or faḍl |
This is a question of case (iʿrāb) that does not change the meaning and generates no ruling; I record it for the sake of the analysis of the word.
And it must be recorded to whom the mercy is near: mina'l-muḥsinīn. It does not say those who pray, but those who do good. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word itself: for two verses supplication has been described, and at the closing the measure set is not supplication itself but conduct.
وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُرْسِلُ ٱلرِّيَٰحَ بُشْرًۢا بَيْنَ يَدَىْ رَحْمَتِهِۦ حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَآ أَقَلَّتْ سَحَابًا ثِقَالًا سُقْنَٰهُ لِبَلَدٍ مَّيِّتٍ فَأَنزَلْنَا بِهِ ٱلْمَآءَ فَأَخْرَجْنَا بِهِۦ مِن كُلِّ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ كَذَٰلِكَ نُخْرِجُ ٱلْمَوْتَىٰ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ · وَٱلْبَلَدُ ٱلطَّيِّبُ يَخْرُجُ نَبَاتُهُۥ بِإِذْنِ رَبِّهِۦ وَٱلَّذِى خَبُثَ لَا يَخْرُجُ إِلَّا نَكِدًا كَذَٰلِكَ نُصَرِّفُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لِقَوْمٍ يَشْكُرُونَ
Wa huwa'lladhī yursilu'r-riyāḥa bushran bayna yaday raḥmatih, ḥattā idhā aqallat saḥāban thiqālan suqnāhu li-baladin mayyitin fa-anzalnā bihi'l-māʾa fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarāt, kadhālika nukhriju'l-mawtā laʿallakum tadhakkarūn · Wa'l-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyibu yakhruju nabātuhū bi-idhni rabbih, wa'lladhī khabutha lā yakhruju illā nakidā, kadhālika nuṣarrifu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yashkurūn
"It is He who sends the winds as bearers of good news before His mercy. Then, when they have taken up heavy clouds, We drive them to a dead land and send down water by them, and by it bring forth every kind of fruit. So too do We bring forth the dead — perhaps you will take it to heart. · The good land brings forth its plants by the leave of its Lord; but that which is bad brings forth nothing but a stunted growth. Thus do We turn the signs about for a people who give thanks."
بَيْنَ يَدَىْ — word for word "between his two hands"; in Arabic it is an idiom meaning "before him, ahead of him". The rain is named raḥma (mercy), and the wind is the good news that goes before it.
A note on the variant reading: for the word bushran the readings nushran (scattering), nushuran and nashran are also transmitted. The difference affects the meaning: on the first reading the wind is a bearer of good news, on the others a scatterer, a disperser. Both senses accord with the picture of the verse; I do not impose a preference.
One — the person changes: the sentence begins with huwa'lladhī yursilu (third person), then becomes suqnāhu … fa-anzalnā … fa-akhrajnā (first person plural). This is the technique called iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address) in Arabic, and it was treated in many places in the index.
I record this as an observation about word order: the shift comes exactly at the point where the verb turns into direct intervention — the wind "is sent", but of the cloud it is said "We drove it".
Two — the number changes: saḥāban thiqālan (heavy clouds, plural adjective) is said, and immediately after it suqnā-hu (it, singular). The lexicographers explain this by the fact that the word saḥāb can count both as a collective noun and as a plural.
أَقَلَّتْ — the root ق-ل-ل: fewness; in Form IV it gives the sense to lift a thing, to take up a load. The lexicographers tie this sense to the picture of "finding a load light and lifting it". That is, the wind carries the heavy cloud as though it were a light load.
I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the meeting of the root's two senses in the same pattern: the verse sets thiqālan (heavy) and aqallat (lifted lightly) side by side. This is a contrast that can be read from the text.
The verse passes from an observation to a conclusion, and the particle of transition is kadhālika (thus).
And that the verb is the same must be recorded: fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarāt → kadhālika nukhriju'l-mawtā. The same verb, two objects.
I record this as an observation about word order: the proof is built not by a likeness but by repeating the same verb. And this connects with the twenty-fifth verse of the sūra: wa minhā tukhrajūn. The same root, the same work.
The fifty-eighth verse is one of the densest likenesses in the Qurʾān, and it must be read together with the observation treated at 13/4 in al-Raʿd.
| What is shared | What differs |
|---|---|
| Yusqā bi-māʾin wāḥid — one water | Nufaḍḍilu baʿḍahā ʿalā baʿḍin fi'l-ukul — the fruits |
The conclusion recorded there was this: the same soil, the same water, even the same root — and yet a different fruit; that is, the difference does not lie in the means that come from outside.
| al-Raʿd 13/4 | al-Aʿrāf 7/58 | |
|---|---|---|
| What is shared | Water — yusqā bi-māʾin wāḥid | Water — the rain that comes down in verse 57 |
| The variable | The plants — ṣinwānun wa ghayru ṣinwān | The soil — al-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib / alladhī khabutha |
| Where the difference stands | Among those that grow in the same soil | Between two different soils |
| The closing sentence | Li-qawmin yaʿqilūn | Li-qawmin yashkurūn |
This is a difference that can be verified from the two texts, and I record the following as my own reading: al-Raʿd shows the difference within the same ground; al-Aʿrāf shows the difference in the ground itself. Read together, two separate questions are answered: why those who receive the same means diverge (al-Raʿd), and why what is received does not yield the same result (al-Aʿrāf). This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The root ط-ي-ب: to be pleasant, clean, good; and to be fertile. Baladun ṭayyib — according to the lexicographers, a land both pleasant and fertile.
The root خ-ب-ث: to be bad, foul, corrupt. The two roots regularly form an opposed pair in the Qurʾān.
| Side | Expression | Pattern |
|---|---|---|
| The good one | Al-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib | A noun (adjective) — a fixed attribute |
| The bad one | Wa'lladhī khabutha | A verb (perfect) — a condition that came about |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the difference of pattern: the good soil is named by an adjective, the bad soil by a verb. An adjective states a condition, a verb states a becoming. In the second a process is intimated. The text does not explain this; the difference of pattern, however, is a countable datum.
And on the second side the word balad is not repeated: wa'lladhī khabutha — "that which is bad". The naming is left incomplete.
The root ن-ك-د: unfruitfulness, giving with difficulty and little. The lexicographers explain the word as "giving with hardship, in small amounts and grudgingly"; biʾrun nakidun — a well whose water comes up with difficulty.
And there is a nicety to be recorded: the verse does not say "nothing comes forth". Lā yakhruju illā nakidā — with the particle of exception: something does come forth, but it is stunted.
I record this as an observation about word order: in the likeness the second side is not drawn as wholly barren. There is an output; its measure is low.
A point of word order must be recorded: the qualification bi-idhni rabbih is placed only on the first side. On the second side there is no such qualification.
The text does not say the reason for this. Several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries (that the qualification is placed on the good side to state that what comes forth is not of itself; or that a single qualification looks to both sides at once). I impose no preference and build no ruling; that the qualification stands on only one side is a datum that can be read from the text, and I write that much.
The root ص-ر-ف had occurred at the forty-seventh verse (ṣurifat abṣāruhum); here it comes in Form II, and as was recorded at 46/27 in al-Aḥqāf, it states repetition and variation: the telling of the same thing by different routes and from different faces. I rely on that treatment.
| Verse | Expression | Who / what is turned |
|---|---|---|
| 47 | Idhā ṣurifat abṣāruhum | Gazes — passive |
| 58 | Kadhālika nuṣarrifu'l-āyāt | The signs — variation |
| 146 | Sa-aṣrifu ʿan āyātiya'lladhīna yatakabbarūn | The proud — being turned away from the signs |
And the closing of the fifty-eighth verse is li-qawmin yashkurūn. The tenth verse had ended with qalīlan mā tashkurūn. The sūra comes from where it stated the littleness of thanks to naming a people who give thanks. I record this as an observation.
7/59-93 — The sequence of prophets: al-Aʿrāf's own pattern
The sixth block of the sūra (59-102) tells of five prophets one after another: Noah, Hūd, Ṣāliḥ, Lot, Shuʿayb. The same five names occur in sequence in other sūras of the Qurʾān too, and two tables of pattern were drawn up in the index. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them; I work out al-Aʿrāf's own pattern separately.
| Source | What was recorded there |
|---|---|
| al-Shuʿarāʾ — "The backbone of the sūra: seven stories, four patterns" | A four-part frame: the announcement of denial (kadhdhabat … al-mursalīn), the opening (idh qāla lahum akhūhum … alā tattaqūn), the threefold entry (innī lakum rasūlun amīn · fa'ttaqu'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajr), the closing seal (inna fī dhālika la-āyatan… · wa inna rabbaka la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'r-raḥīm). Eight blocks, word for word the same seal. |
| Hūd — Table 3 and Table 4 | No seal, but five scattered closing patterns (jāʾa amrunā, najjaynā, buʿdan li-, ka-an lam yaghnaw fīhā, a closing of its own); and the sūra distributes its own opening call (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh, 11/3) among the mouths of three prophets. The address yā qawmi occurs sixteen times. |
The difference between the three sūras can be gathered in a single sentence, and it is a countable datum: al-Shuʿarāʾ likens its stories to one another, Hūd separates them from one another, and al-Aʿrāf stands between the two — it has a shared opening sentence but no shared closing seal.
يَٰقَوْمِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مَا لَكُم مِّنْ إِلَٰهٍ غَيْرُهُۥ Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh "O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him."
This sentence occurs four times in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form. This is the result of a count:
| Prophet | Verse | What comes before the sentence | What comes after the sentence |
|---|---|---|---|
| Noah | 59 | Laqad arsalnā Nūḥan ilā qawmihī fa-qāla | Innī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm — a statement of fear |
| Hūd | 65 | Wa ilā ʿĀdin akhāhum Hūdā, qāla | A-fa-lā tattaqūn — a question |
| Ṣāliḥ | 73 | Wa ilā Thamūda akhāhum Ṣāliḥā, qāla | Qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum — a proof |
| Shuʿayb | 85 | Wa ilā Madyana akhāhum Shuʿaybā, qāla | Qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum — a proof |
| Lot | 80 | Wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihī | No sentence — directly a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata |
One — in the story of Lot there is no shared opening sentence. In four of the five stories yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh is present; in Lot's it is not. And as was recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra, the word malaʾ too is absent only from the story of Lot. Two absences gather in the same story; this is a countable datum.
Two — Noah's entry is built differently from the others. Only for Noah is the verb laqad arsalnā (We sent) used; for the others there is the pattern wa ilā … akhāhum (their brother), without a verb. That is, the first link of the sequence is built with a full sentence, the later ones by attachment.
Three — the qualification akhāhum (their brother) is present in three stories (65, 73, 85), and absent in Noah's and Lot's. In al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 2 the distribution of akhūhum in al-Shuʿarāʾ was worked out, and it was recorded there that it drops out in Shuʿayb's case, the reason being that the addressees are named by a place. In al-Aʿrāf the distribution is different: with Shuʿayb akhāhum is present, because al-Aʿrāf names the addressees as Madyan — at 26/176 in al-Shuʿarāʾ the addressees were aṣḥābu'l-Ayka (the people of a place). The two sūras name the addressees of the same prophet by two different names, and the qualification akhūhum changes accordingly. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts, and it supports the explanation given at 26/176 in al-Shuʿarāʾ.
Four — what follows the opening sentence is different in every story: fear, question, proof, proof. What is shared is the call; what changes is the ground placed behind the call.
| Prophet | Closing | Pattern |
|---|---|---|
| Noah (64) | Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū fi'l-fulki wa aghraqnā'lladhīna kadhdhabū | Deliverance + drowning |
| Hūd (72) | Fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū bi-raḥmatin minnā wa qaṭaʿnā dābira'lladhīna kadhdhabū | Deliverance + cutting off the line |
| Ṣāliḥ (78) | Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn | The quaking |
| Lot (83-84) | Fa-anjaynāhu wa ahlahū … wa amṭarnā ʿalayhim maṭarā | Deliverance + a raining down |
| Shuʿayb (91) | Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn | The quaking |
One — the seventy-eighth and ninety-first verses are word for word identical. This repetition was counted in the section on the structure of the sūra; here it falls into place: al-Aʿrāf's only word-for-word repeated closing is between Thamūd and Madyan.
Two — in three stories anjaynā (We delivered) is present, in two it is absent (Ṣāliḥ and Shuʿayb). And in exactly those two stories the rajfa is present. That is, where deliverance is named the quaking is not, and where the quaking is named deliverance is not. I record this as the result of a count; the text does not say the reason, and I invent no reason.
| Verse | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 79 | Ṣāliḥ | Fa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum risālata rabbī wa naṣaḥtu lakum wa lākin lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn |
| 93 | Shuʿayb | Fa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum risālāti rabbī wa naṣaḥtu lakum, fa-kayfa āsā ʿalā qawmin kāfirīn |
The only difference is singular against plural: risālata (singular) and risālāti (plural). This is a difference that can be verified from the text, and the lexicographers explain risālāt by "the multiplicity of the messages sent".
And the second difference is at the end of the sentence: Ṣāliḥ says lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn (you do not love those who counsel) — he describes the addressee; Shuʿayb says fa-kayfa āsā ʿalā qawmin kāfirīn (how then should I grieve?) — he states his own condition.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the endings of the two sentences: the same pattern is used twice, and in both the final sentence is a note of feeling, and the two look in different directions.
The root ن-ص-ح: purity, freedom from admixture; and from this, to counsel out of a wish for another's good. The lexicographers tie the root to the pictures of the clarifying of honey (nāṣiḥu'l-ʿasal — pure honey) and the soundness of a seam (niṣāḥ — sewing thread). That is, counsel is both unmixed and something that joins parts together.
| Verse | Expression | Who |
|---|---|---|
| 62 | Wa anṣaḥu lakum | Noah |
| 68 | Wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn | Hūd |
| 79 | Wa naṣaḥtu lakum … lā tuḥibbūna'n-nāṣiḥīn | Ṣāliḥ |
| 93 | Wa naṣaḥtu lakum | Shuʿayb |
And the same root had occurred once more in the second block of the sūra — but in the opposite direction: wa qāsamahumā innī lakumā la-mina'n-nāṣiḥīn (21) — in the mouth of Iblīs.
This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record the following as my own reading: al-Aʿrāf puts the sentence "I am one who counsels you" first into the mouth of a liar, then into the mouths of four prophets. And the difference between them is given in the sūra's own words: Iblīs's is built with an oath (wa qāsamahumā), the prophets' without one. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
7/59-64 — Noah
Laqad arsalnā Nūḥan ilā qawmihī fa-qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, innī akhāfu ʿalaykum ʿadhāba yawmin ʿaẓīm · Qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmihī innā la-narāka fī ḍalālin mubīn · Qāla yā qawmi laysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Uballighukum risālāti rabbī wa anṣaḥu lakum wa aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn · A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum wa li-tattaqū wa laʿallakum turḥamūn · Fa-kadhdhabūhu fa-anjaynāhu wa'lladhīna maʿahū fi'l-fulki wa aghraqnā'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā innahum kānū qawman ʿamīn
"We sent Noah to his people. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. I fear for you the punishment of a mighty day.' · The notables of his people said: 'We see you in plain error.' · He said: 'O my people! There is no error in me; I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · I convey to you the messages of my Lord, and I counsel you, and I know from God what you do not know. · Do you find it strange that a reminder from your Lord should come to you through a man from among yourselves, to warn you, that you may guard yourselves and be shown mercy?' · They called him a liar; so We delivered him and those with him in the ark, and drowned those who called Our signs lies. They were indeed a blind people."
The relation between the words of the other side and the words of the answer must be recorded, and this is a point of word order:
| Who | Expression | Pattern of the word |
|---|---|---|
| The notables (60) | Innā la-narāka fī ḍalālin mubīn | Ḍalāl — verbal noun |
| Noah (61) | Laysa bī ḍalālatun | Ḍalāla — feminine verbal noun |
The two words are from the same root (ض-ل-ل) but their patterns differ. The lexicographers explain this difference thus: the pattern ḍalāla lends itself, as against ḍalāl, to a negation that takes in even the smallest amount — that is, the answer means not "I am not in a great error" but "there is no straying in me at all".
I convey this explanation as it is transmitted, and the difference of pattern is a datum that can be read from the text.
And the construction of the answer must also be recorded: laysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn. The objection is rejected and something is put in its place. I record this as an observation about word order: the answer is not a defence but a statement of identity.
And the same two-step answer will be repeated word for word in the story of Hūd (66-67: the objection safāha → laysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn). The same structure in two stories, with two different words of objection. This is a countable datum and will be tabulated at Hūd.
The limit of the sentence must be recorded: aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn — the source of the knowledge is stated.
That is, the sentence does not say "I know more than you"; it says "I know something that comes from God". I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle min.
The sentence begins with a question, and the subject of the question is not what has come but through whom it has come: ʿalā rajulin minkum.
| Verse | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 63 | Noah | A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum wa li-tattaqū wa laʿallakum turḥamūn |
| 69 | Hūd | A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum li-yundhirakum |
The difference: with Noah three purposes are counted (warning, guarding, mercy), with Hūd only one (warning). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
And the subject of the objection is worth recording: what is objected to is not the message but the messenger's being a human being. The same objection will be turned back on the addressee in the last block of the sūra (7/184: a-wa lam yatafakkarū mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna). This link will close at verse 184.
The root ع-م-ي: blindness. ʿAmīn is the plural of ʿamā, and the lexicographers record a difference of emphasis between aʿmā (one whose eye does not see) and ʿamī: ʿamī is used more for blindness of heart.
And the place of the word in the sūra must be recorded: the theme of blindness will return in the last block of the sūra — 7/179 (lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā) and 7/198 (wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn). The word the sūra uses to close the first story of the sequence it turns at the end into a general diagnosis. I record this as an observation.
7/65-72 — Hūd
Wa ilā ʿĀdin akhāhum Hūdā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, a-fa-lā tattaqūn · Qāla'l-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmihī innā la-narāka fī safāhatin wa innā la-naẓunnuka mina'l-kādhibīn · Qāla yā qawmi laysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Uballighukum risālāti rabbī wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn
"And to ʿĀd [We sent] their brother Hūd. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. Will you not then guard yourselves?' · The notables of his people who denied said: 'We see you in folly, and we think you are one of the liars.' · He said: 'O my people! There is no folly in me; I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · I convey to you the messages of my Lord, and I am to you a trustworthy counsellor.'"
In the stories of Noah and Hūd the objection and the answer settle into the same pattern. This is a countable datum:
| Noah (60-61) | Hūd (66-67) | |
|---|---|---|
| The objector | Al-malaʾu min qawmih — without qualifier | Al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmih |
| The word of the objection | Ḍalāl — straying from the way | Safāha — lightness of mind |
| A second objection | (none) | Wa innā la-naẓunnuka mina'l-kādhibīn — the suspicion of lying |
| The answer | Laysa bī ḍalālatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn | Laysa bī safāhatun wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn |
| What follows | Wa anṣaḥu lakum wa aʿlamu mina'llāhi mā lā taʿlamūn | Wa anā lakum nāṣiḥun amīn |
The second half of the sentence (wa lākinnī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn) is word for word identical in the two stories; what changes is only the word that is rejected.
And the difference between the two objections is worth recording: ḍalāl is a fault of direction (on the wrong road), safāha a fault of capacity (light of mind). The root س-ف-ه: lightness, want of measure. The lexicographers tie the root to a garment or a rope being light and slack.
I record this as an observation: the second objection is heavier than the first — it aims not at the road but at the mind. And the third thing added to it is a statement of supposition: la-naẓunnuka — "we think". That is, the claim is offered not as proof but as opinion.
| Verse | Who | Successors after whom | What was given |
|---|---|---|---|
| 69 | Hūd → ʿĀd | Min baʿdi qawmi Nūḥ | Wa zādakum fi'l-khalqi basṭatan — an increase in build |
| 74 | Ṣāliḥ → Thamūd | Min baʿdi ʿĀd | Tattakhidhūna min suhūlihā quṣūran wa tanḥitūna'l-jibāla buyūtā — palaces on the plain, houses hewn in the mountains |
The two reminders build a chain: the people of Noah → ʿĀd → Thamūd. That is, the sūra lines up the stories not side by side but one after another, each link taking the place of the one before it. This is a weave that can be verified from the text.
بَسْطَةً فِى ٱلْخَلْقِ — the root ب-س-ط: to spread, to extend. What it is an extension of is not named in the text. In the classical commentaries it is explained as stature and strength; I convey this explanation as it is transmitted and go into no further detail, because the verse does not (Method).
A-tujādilūnanī fī asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum mā nazzala'llāhu bihā min sulṭān "Do you dispute with me about names that you and your forefathers have given? God has sent down no warrant for them."
The work of the sentence must be recorded, and this is an observation about word order: the subject of the dispute is named not as an entity but as a name.
| The sentence could have been built thus | What is built |
|---|---|
| "Do you dispute about the things you worship?" | Asmāʾin sammaytumūhā — "about names that you have given" |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is two words (asmāʾ and sulṭān): the verse brings what the other side holds down to the level of naming, and sets against it the measure of a warrant sent down. That is, the dispute is taken off the axis of "your god or mine" and moved onto the axis of "what do you have in hand".
And the same sentence will return in the last block of the sūra: at 7/194-195 what the things called upon can do will be counted one by one. That link will close there.
And there is a limit to be recorded: no general ruling about naming as such is to be drawn from this. The subject of the verse is namings for which there is no support whatever, and the sentence enters that qualification itself.
دَابِر — the root د-ب-ر: the back, the end of a thing, what comes behind it. Dābir is the hindmost of a company, that is, the continuation of a line. Qaṭaʿnā dābirahum — "We cut off what was behind them", that is, We left them no continuation.
The expression occurs in al-Aʿrāf only in this verse (72), and it is the closing of only one of the five stories. This is a countable datum.
And the two halves of the closing must be recorded: fa-anjaynāhu … bi-raḥmatin minnā and wa qaṭaʿnā dābira'lladhīna kadhdhabū. The deliverance is given with a note of mercy, the destruction with a note of continuity: one remains, the other's line is cut off.
7/73-79 — Ṣāliḥ
Wa ilā Thamūda akhāhum Ṣāliḥā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum, hādhihī nāqatu'llāhi lakum āyatan fa-dharūhā taʾkul fī arḍi'llāh wa lā tamassūhā bi-sūʾin fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābun alīm
"And to Thamūd [We sent] their brother Ṣāliḥ. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. A clear proof has come to you from your Lord: this is the she-camel of God — a sign for you. Let her be, to eat in God's earth; do not touch her with harm, or a painful punishment will seize you.'"
The root ن-و-ق: a she-camel. The Qurʾān speaks of this camel in several places (al-Aʿrāf 7/73; Hūd 11/64; al-Isrāʾ 17/59; al-Qamar 54/27; al-Shams 91/13) and it was treated in al-Qamar and al-Shams. I rely on those treatments.
And here there is a limit I must write out plainly, per the method: the Qurʾān says nothing about where the camel came from, how she appeared, her size, her colour, or her milk. There are detailed accounts transmitted in the classical sources; this commentary does not enter into them — because the verse does not, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).
| What is said | Verse |
|---|---|
| The camel is a sign | Hādhihī nāqatu'llāhi lakum āyatan |
| She is to be left alone | Fa-dharūhā taʾkul fī arḍi'llāh |
| She is not to be touched | Wa lā tamassūhā bi-sūʾin |
| The consequence | Fa-yaʾkhudhakum ʿadhābun alīm |
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sign given is not a thing to be done but a thing not to be done. Both commands are a withdrawal: let her be, and do not touch.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two verbs themselves: the test is built not with a demand for an act but with a demand for a withholding of the hand. And what was given to Adam in the second block of the sūra was of the same kind: wa lā taqrabā hādhihi'sh-shajarata (19) — a prohibition. In both scenes the subject of the test is that what is given not be taken. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.
The seventy-fifth verse is the clearest instance of the "line of class" recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra:
Qāla'l-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū min qawmihī lilladhīna'stuḍʿifū li-man āmana minhum: a-taʿlamūna anna Ṣāliḥan mursalun min rabbih
| Pattern | Root | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| Istakbarū | ك-ب-ر | To reckon oneself great — with a subject, what they themselves did |
| Ustuḍʿifū | ض-ع-ف | To be made weak — passive, what another did |
The difference of voice must be recorded, and it is a datum of word order: the first is active, the second passive. That is, the verse gives weakness not as an attribute but as something that was done.
The same root was treated at 26/22 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, where it was recorded: istiḍʿāf — weakness is not something that comes of itself, it is something done. I rely on that treatment.
And there is an appositive note within the verse, and it must be recorded: lilladhīna'stuḍʿifū li-man āmana minhum — "to those made weak, to those of them who believed". The second expression narrows the first.
I record this as an observation about word order: the verse does not equate "those made weak" with "those who believed"; it separates the second out from within the first. That is, here too the sūra builds no blanket judgement about a class (Method).
The root ع-ق-ر: to bring an animal down by cutting its leg; and from this, to kill. The lexicographers give the primary sense as the cutting of the leg tendon.
The root ع-ت-و: to exceed the bound, to hold out in pride, to dry and harden. ʿAtā ʿan amri rabbih — "he went out from the command of his Lord".
And the order of the verbs is worth recording: first the act, then the naming of the act. The verse does not say "they went out from the command and hamstrung the camel"; it says the reverse. I record this as an observation about word order.
| Verse | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 70 | ʿĀd | Fa'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn |
| 77 | Thamūd | Yā Ṣāliḥu'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta mina'l-mursalīn |
The only difference is in the last word: one ṣādiqīn (those who speak truly), the other mursalīn (those who are sent). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
And as was recorded at 26/31 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, the conditional particle is in, not idhā — in Arabic in is used for the doubtful, idhā for the certain. I rely on that treatment.
The root ج-ث-م: an animal's sinking down on its breast and knees, sticking fast to the ground. The lexicographers use the word especially for a bird's crouching to the ground.
And the choice of the word is worth recording: jāthimīn states a posture, not an annihilation. The scene is of bodies left collapsed where they were.
And precisely this sentence occurs twice in the sūra (78 and 91) — it was counted in the section on the structure of the sūra. It must also be recorded that for the same event the Qurʾān uses other words in other sūras (ṣāʿiqa at Fuṣṣilat 41/13; ṣayḥa at al-Qamar 54/31). They were treated in Fuṣṣilat and al-Qamar; I rely on those treatments. This variation is explained as the naming of different aspects of the same event; I convey it as transmitted and impose no preference.
7/80-84 — Lot
Wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihī a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata mā sabaqakum bihā min aḥadin mina'l-ʿālamīn · Innakum la-taʾtūna'r-rijāla shahwatan min dūni'n-nisāʾ, bal antum qawmun musrifūn · Wa mā kāna jawāba qawmihī illā an qālū akhrijūhum min qaryatikum innahum unāsun yataṭahharūn · Fa-anjaynāhu wa ahlahū illa'mraʾatahū kānat mina'l-ghābirīn · Wa amṭarnā ʿalayhim maṭarā, fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mujrimīn
"And Lot too [We sent]. He said to his people: 'Do you commit that indecency which no one in all the worlds committed before you? · You approach men with desire instead of women. You are indeed a people who exceed all bounds.' · And the only answer of his people was to say: 'Drive them out of your town; they are people who would keep themselves pure.' · We delivered him and his household — except his wife; she was of those who stayed behind. · And We rained down upon them a rain. See, then, what was the end of the guilty!"
This story is the link in the sūra's sequence of prophets where the pattern breaks most, and it carries three absences at once. All three are countable:
| Shared element | In the other four stories | In the story of Lot |
|---|---|---|
| Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh | present (59, 65, 73, 85) | absent |
| Akhāhum — "their brother" | present at 65, 73, 85 | absent |
| Al-malaʾ — the notables | present at 60, 66, 75, 88, 90 | absent — the addressee is directly qawmuh |
And there is a fourth difference: the verb of entry. In the others there was arsalnā or the pattern wa ilā … akhāhum; here it is wa Lūṭan idh qāla li-qawmihī — the speech is entered directly.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the four absences above: in al-Aʿrāf's story of Lot the call opens not as a call to tawḥīd but directly as a question about conduct. The text does not say the reason for this. And in the classical commentaries the explanation is transmitted that Lot's people were not of his own lineage — and that therefore akhūhum is not said; I convey this explanation as transmitted and claim no certainty for it.
The root ف-ح-ش was treated at the thirty-third verse (innamā ḥarrama rabbiya'l-fawāḥisha mā ẓahara minhā wa mā baṭan); the sense of the root: an indecency that exceeds the measure. I rely on that treatment.
The root س-ر-ف was treated at the thirty-first verse (wa lā tusrifū innahū lā yuḥibbu'l-musrifīn); the sense of the root: to exceed the bound in something, to put it out of its place. I rely on that treatment.
And the return of the two roots in this story is worth recording, and it is a weave that can be verified within the sūra:
| Root | Where earlier in the sūra | Here |
|---|---|---|
| ف-ح-ش | 28 (idhā faʿalū fāḥishatan), 33 (ḥarrama … al-fawāḥish) | 80 — a-taʾtūna'l-fāḥishata |
| س-ر-ف | 31 (wa lā tusrifū) | 81 — qawmun musrifūn |
That is, the sūra places in the sixth block, inside a story, the two measures it laid down in the third block. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words themselves.
And I draw no legal ruling from this; I content myself with conveying the naming the verse sets down (Method). And this note is necessary: the verse names a behaviour; it builds no blanket judgement about a community. This is the sūra's own principle, and it was recorded in the section on the structure: what is described is an attribute, and whoever carries that attribute is included in it.
The answer of the other side is worth recording, and it is one of the most striking sentences in the block.
That is, what is counted as the ground for banishment is, in the other side's own mouth, a word of praise.
| The expected ground | The ground given |
|---|---|
| An accusation | Innahum unāsun yataṭahharūn — "people who would keep themselves pure" |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the sentence itself: the decision to drive them out is grounded not on a fault of the one driven out but on his attribute. And it is recorded in the classical commentaries that there is a tone of mockery in the language of the sentence; I convey this explanation as transmitted.
And the sentence akhrijūhum min qaryatikum is not alone in the sūra: the same will be said to Shuʿayb in verse 88 — la-nukhrijannaka yā Shuʿaybu … min qaryatinā.
| Verse | Who is to be driven out | Who says it |
|---|---|---|
| 82 | Lot and those with him | His people |
| 88 | Shuʿayb and those who believed | Al-malaʾ |
The same threat in two stories. And the same root had occurred elsewhere in the second block of the sūra: fa-akhrajahumā mimmā kānā fīh (the counterpart in al-Aʿrāf of al-Baqara 2/36 being 7/27: kamā akhraja abawaykum mina'l-janna). In this sūra being driven out is a repeated verb. I record this as an observation.
The root غ-ب-ر: to remain behind, to be left over. Ghābir — the one who remains behind, who is left after those who go. The word is repeated several times in the Qurʾān for this event (al-Aʿrāf 7/83; al-Ḥijr 15/60; al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/171) and was treated in al-Shuʿarāʾ. I rely on that treatment.
And a point of word order must be recorded: kānat mina'l-ghābirīn — a feminine subject is ascribed to a masculine plural group. This is a common construction in Arabic for stating inclusion in a company, and it has occurred elsewhere in the index too.
The root م-ط-ر: rain. And the pattern of the verb must be recorded: Form IV, amṭara. The lexicographers transmit a distinction: maṭara (Form I) is used for mercy, amṭara (Form IV) for punishment.
This distinction is not certain and does not hold everywhere; but it is transmitted, and it accords with this verse. I convey it as transmitted and do not present it as a settled rule of the language.
And it must be recorded that the word maṭarā (rain) is left without a specification: what was rained down is not said here. In other places in the Qurʾān stones are named for this event (al-Ḥijr 15/74; Hūd 11/82); al-Aʿrāf does not say it. Where it does not say, neither do I.
7/85-93 — Shuʿayb
Wa ilā Madyana akhāhum Shuʿaybā, qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, qad jāʾatkum bayyinatun min rabbikum, fa-awfu'l-kayla wa'l-mīzāna wa lā tabkhasu'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā, dhālikum khayrun lakum in kuntum muʾminīn
"And to Madyan [We sent] their brother Shuʿayb. He said: 'O my people! Serve God; you have no god but Him. A clear proof has come to you from your Lord. Give full measure and full weight; do not give people less than their due; do not work corruption on the earth after it has been set in order. That is better for you, if you are believers.'"
In the four stories what came after the shared opening sentence was different (it was given in the table of the pattern above). With Shuʿayb that place is filled with three prohibitions, and all three concern measure:
| # | Command/prohibition | Field |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Fa-awfu'l-kayla wa'l-mīzān | Measure and weight — an affirmative command |
| 2 | Wa lā tabkhasū'n-nāsa ashyāʾahum | Giving short — a prohibition |
| 3 | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | The earth — a prohibition |
The third is word for word identical with the fifty-sixth verse, and this repetition was tabulated in the section on the structure of the sūra: the sūra puts its own command into the mouth of a prophet. In Hūd Table 4 it was shown that Sūrat Hūd does the same thing four times (istaghfirū rabbakum thumma tūbū ilayh → 11/3 and the mouths of three prophets). I rely on that treatment: al-Aʿrāf applies the same technique once.
The root ب-خ-س: to give a thing less than its due, to lower its value. The verb occurs in Shuʿayb's mouth in other places in the Qurʾān too (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/183; Hūd 11/85) and the subject of measure was treated in detail in al-Muṭaffifīn. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.
Wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna wa taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi man āmana bihī wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajā "Do not sit on every road, threatening; do not bar from the way of God those who believe in Him, and do not seek to make that way crooked."
And this sentence has a precedent within the sūra. This is a verifiable overlap and must be recorded:
| Verse | Who | Sentence |
|---|---|---|
| 16 | Iblīs | La-aqʿudanna lahum ṣirāṭaka'l-mustaqīm |
| 86 | Madyan | Wa lā taqʿudū bi-kulli ṣirāṭin tūʿidūna |
The same verb (ق-ع-د — to sit) and the same word (ṣirāṭ). The first a statement of intent, the second a prohibition.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verb and object of the two verses: the sūra forbids to a human community, in the eighty-sixth verse, the work described in the sixteenth. That is, sitting at the head of the road is first told in the sūra as a stance, then forbidden as something a human being can do. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
And the sentence wa tabghūnahā ʿiwajā occurs twice in the sūra (45 and 86) — it was counted in the section on the structure. The first was the description of the wrongdoers in the scene of the hereafter; the second is a prohibition here.
The root ع-و-ج: crookedness. And the lexicographers record a distinction between ʿiwaj (with kasra) and ʿawaj (with fatḥa): ʿawaj is used for crookedness seen by the eye (a stick, a wall), ʿiwaj for crookedness that is not seen (a word, a religion, a road). This distinction is transmitted and accords with the verse; I convey it as transmitted.
In the story of Shuʿayb malaʾ occurs twice, and this is the highest number for any one prophet in the sūra. It was counted in the section on the structure; here it is treated:
| Verse | How it is qualified | To whom it speaks | What it says |
|---|---|---|---|
| 88 | Al-malaʾu'lladhīna'stakbarū | To Shuʿayb and those who believed | La-nukhrijannaka … aw la-taʿūdunna fī millatinā — banishment or return |
| 90 | Al-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū | To their own people | La-ini'ttabaʿtum Shuʿayban innakum idhan la-khāsirūn — a warning of loss to whoever follows |
The direction of the two addresses differs: one outward, the other inward. I record this as an observation about word order: the other side speaks first with the messenger, then with those who might listen to the messenger.
| Verse | Sentence |
|---|---|
| 90 | La-ini'ttabaʿtum Shuʿayban innakum idhan la-khāsirūn |
| 92 | Alladhīna kadhdhabū Shuʿayban kānū humu'l-khāsirīn |
The same word, with the subject reversed. Of those who said "if you follow him you will be losers" it is said "they were the losers themselves". This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
The lexicographers dwell on aw la-taʿūdunna fī millatinā ("or you shall return to our creed") in the eighty-eighth verse and on the expression in ʿudnā fī millatikum in the eighty-ninth.
The question is this: does the verb ʿawda (to return) require having previously been in that state? Two explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries, and I give them in a table:
| Reading | What ʿawd is here | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The verb has the sense "to enter, to pass into"; it does not require having previously been in that state | The use of the verb ʿāda in Arabic in the sense of ṣāra (he became, he came to be) |
| 2 | The word is spoken with regard to the majority of those who believed; the condition of the many is ascribed to the company | That the addressees of the sentence are Shuʿayb and those with him — for the second group returning is meant in its literal sense |
Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. This is a question of language and is not used to build a ruling about prophets (Method).
The root غ-ن-ي: to settle and remain in a place, to live there without want. Maghnā — a dwelling place. The pattern means "as though they had never dwelt there".
In Hūd Table 3 this pattern was counted as one of the five closing patterns of Sūrat Hūd (11/68, 11/95). I rely on that treatment.
And a point of word order must be recorded: in the ninety-second verse the expression alladhīna kadhdhabū Shuʿayban occurs twice — at the beginning of the sentence and in the middle. A pronoun could have been used; it was not.
I record this as an observation about word order: the repetition fixes twice over who the subject is. And in the second sentence the pronoun hum (they) is added as well: kānū humu'l-khāsirīn — the pronoun of separation (ḍamīr al-faṣl), which states restriction: "they were the losers themselves".
وَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَا فِى قَرْيَةٍ مِّن نَّبِىٍّ إِلَّآ أَخَذْنَآ أَهْلَهَا بِٱلْبَأْسَآءِ وَٱلضَّرَّآءِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَضَّرَّعُونَ · ثُمَّ بَدَّلْنَا مَكَانَ ٱلسَّيِّئَةِ ٱلْحَسَنَةَ حَتَّىٰ عَفَوا۟ وَّقَالُوا۟ قَدْ مَسَّ ءَابَآءَنَا ٱلضَّرَّآءُ وَٱلسَّرَّآءُ فَأَخَذْنَٰهُم بَغْتَةً وَهُمْ لَا يَشْعُرُونَ
Wa mā arsalnā fī qaryatin min nabiyyin illā akhadhnā ahlahā bi'l-baʾsāʾi wa'ḍ-ḍarrāʾi laʿallahum yaḍḍarraʿūn · Thumma baddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanata ḥattā ʿafaw wa qālū qad massa ābāʾana'ḍ-ḍarrāʾu wa's-sarrāʾu fa-akhadhnāhum baghtatan wa hum lā yashʿurūn
"Into whatever land We sent a prophet, We seized its people with hardship and affliction — that they might humble themselves. · Then We put good in the place of ill, until they grew many and said, 'Hardship and ease touched our forefathers too.' So We seized them suddenly, while they were unaware."
When the five stories are finished the sūra lays down a rule, and the form of the rule must be recorded: negation + exception (mā … illā).
This pattern is the strongest generalisation in Arabic: "We sent to no place without … coming about."
| Stage | What is done | What is expected | What happens |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 (94) | Baʾsāʾ and ḍarrāʾ — hardship | Laʿallahum yaḍḍarraʿūn — pleading | (the text does not state the outcome) |
| 2 (95) | Baddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanata — ease | — | Ḥattā ʿafaw and a sentence: qad massa ābāʾana'ḍ-ḍarrāʾu wa's-sarrāʾu |
And the outcome of the second stage is a sentence, not a behaviour. I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the verse itself: what nullifies the test turns out to be an explanation — "such things happen anyway, they happened to our forefathers too."
That is, the event is taken out of being a sign and turned into a natural occurrence. And this lies on the same line as the twenty-eighth verse of the sūra: there too the ground of the behaviour was tied to the forefathers (wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā).
عَفَوا۟ — the root ع-ف-و. One of the primary senses of the root is to become many, to increase (when hair grows long and thick it is said ʿafā'sh-shaʿr). The lexicographers dwell on the meaning of the word in this verse, and two explanations are transmitted:
| Reading | What ʿafaw means |
|---|---|
| 1 | They grew many — they increased in number and in goods |
| 2 | They became well off, at ease — their livelihood widened |
And this word will return in the last block of the sūra with another sense: khudhi'l-ʿafw (199). The same root, two different branches of meaning. This link will be treated at verse 199.
The root ش-ع-ر: to notice a fine thing, to sense it. The root is akin to shaʿr (hair); the lexicographers tie shuʿūr to the picture of "becoming aware of something as fine as a hair".
And the coming together of the two words is worth recording: baghtatan states the speed of the event, lā yashʿurūn the condition of the addressee. Together they overlap with the picture in the fourth verse of the sūra: fa-jāʾahā baʾsunā bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn — in the sleep of night or in the sleep of noon. The sūra says the same thing twice, with two different words.
وَلَوْ أَنَّ أَهْلَ ٱلْقُرَىٰٓ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَٱتَّقَوْا۟ لَفَتَحْنَا عَلَيْهِم بَرَكَٰتٍ مِّنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَلَٰكِن كَذَّبُوا۟ فَأَخَذْنَٰهُم بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يَكْسِبُونَ
Wa law anna ahla'l-qurā āmanū wa'ttaqaw la-fataḥnā ʿalayhim barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍi wa lākin kadhdhabū fa-akhadhnāhum bimā kānū yaksibūn · A-fa-amina ahlu'l-qurā an yaʾtiyahum baʾsunā bayātan wa hum nāʾimūn · Aw amina ahlu'l-qurā an yaʾtiyahum baʾsunā ḍuḥan wa hum yalʿabūn · A-fa-aminū makra'llāh, fa-lā yaʾmanu makra'llāhi illa'l-qawmu'l-khāsirūn
"Had the people of those towns believed and guarded themselves, We would have opened upon them blessings from heaven and earth. But they called it a lie; so We seized them for what they had earned. · Did the people of those towns feel secure that Our violence would not come upon them by night, while they slept? · Or did the people of those towns feel secure that Our violence would not come upon them in the forenoon, while they played? · Did they feel secure from the devising of God? None feels secure from the devising of God but a people who are lost."
The ninety-sixth verse is the most striking sentence in the sūra's section of rules, and its construction must be recorded.
Law — in Arabic the particle of the unfulfilled condition. In English it answers to "had they … We would have": it states that the condition did not obtain, and therefore neither did the consequence.
That is, the verse is not a promise but the record of a possibility that did not come about. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle.
And the second half of the sentence confirms it: wa lākin kadhdhabū — "but they called it a lie". The adversative particle (lākin) says outright that the condition did not obtain.
This pattern was treated at 23/77 in al-Muʾminūn, where a table of three links was drawn up. I rely on that treatment and carry the table over here:
| Place | What is opened | What |
|---|---|---|
| al-Anʿām 6/44 | Abwāba kulli shayʾ — the gates of everything | Bounty |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/96 | Barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍ | Blessing |
| al-Muʾminūn 23/77 | Bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīd | Punishment |
The conclusion recorded there was: the same pattern, the reverse content. And it was further recorded in al-Muʾminūn that at al-Anʿām 6/44, after the gates of bounty are opened, akhadhnāhum baghtatan follows.
The difference that belongs here is this, and it must be recorded: in al-Aʿrāf the gate is not opened. In al-Anʿām and al-Muʾminūn the act has taken place (fataḥnā), in al-Aʿrāf it is the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition (la-fataḥnā).
That is, the three verses hold three states of the same pattern: opened-bounty, opened-punishment, would-have-opened-did-not. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verb forms of the three verses.
The root ب-ر-ك: a thing's staying fixed, settling; and from this, increasing, lasting good. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of a camel kneeling and settling (baraka'l-baʿīr); and a pool of water (birka) is from the same root. That is, blessing is what stays, not what flows away.
| Verse | Form | What |
|---|---|---|
| 54 | Tabāraka'llāhu rabbu'l-ʿālamīn | A verb — the fixedness of loftiness |
| 96 | Barakātin mina's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍ | A noun, plural — what would have been opened |
The same root, in the verse that opens the fifth block of the sūra and in the rule that closes the sixth. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
And the plural pattern must be recorded: barakāt — an indefinite plural. Not the singular (baraka). The lexicographers record that the indefinite plural here states multiplicity and variety.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the fifty-seventh verse: there too the water came down from the sky (fa-anzalnā bihi'l-māʾa) and the produce came out of the earth (fa-akhrajnā bihī min kulli'th-thamarāt). The pair in the ninety-sixth verse is the name of the two movements in the fifty-seventh. This is a reading, not a ruling.
And per the method (Method) I draw a limit: no mechanical law between faith and economic prosperity is to be derived from this. The sūra's own verses do not allow it: the ninety-fourth verse says that in every place a messenger was sent the people were seized with hardship; the ninety-fifth says that abundance too is a test. And the fifty-first verse records that the life of this world can delude.
That is, the sūra does not set up prosperity as a mark of reward. I record this as a datum of the text, and its ground is the sūra's own verses.
The ninety-seventh, ninety-eighth and ninety-ninth verses begin with the same verb: amina (he felt secure). Three questions, three different objects:
| Verse | What they felt secure from | Time/state |
|---|---|---|
| 97 | Baʾsunā — the violence | Bayātan wa hum nāʾimūn — by night, asleep |
| 98 | Baʾsunā — the violence | Ḍuḥan wa hum yalʿabūn — in the forenoon, at play |
| 99 | Makra'llāh | (no time given) |
The first two verses overlap with the fourth verse of the sūra (bayātan aw hum qāʾilūn) and both choose the slackest moments of daily life: sleep and play.
I record this as an observation: the sūra places the danger not in the hour of work but in the hour of rest.
And the verb yalʿabūn connects with the fifty-first verse: there it was said that they took their religion as lahwan wa laʿibā. The same root, one an attribute and one a state.
For the word مَكْر I enter a note of tanzīh, per the method (Method):
The root م-ك-ر: to take a hidden measure, to act by a route the other side has not reckoned with. The word is not of itself pejorative in Arabic; the evil comes from against whom and for what it is done.
And when the word is ascribed to God in the Qurʾān, the shared note of the lexicographers and the exegetes is this: it is the requiting of the devising men have set up, by a route they have not reckoned with. It does not mean deception, trickery or injustice.
And the Qurʾān itself sets this out expressly in another place: wa yamkurūna wa yamkuru'llāh wa'llāhu khayru'l-mākirīn (al-Anfāl 8/30). That is, the word occurs in a context of requital.
I enter this note and close the discussion; I enter into no polemic of kalām (Method).
And the closing of the ninety-ninth verse must be recorded: fa-lā yaʾmanu makra'llāhi illa'l-qawmu'l-khāsirūn. The same word had occurred in the ninetieth and ninety-second verses in the story of Shuʿayb. The sūra carries the word of the story over into the rule.
أَوَلَمْ يَهْدِ لِلَّذِينَ يَرِثُونَ ٱلْأَرْضَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ أَهْلِهَآ أَن لَّوْ نَشَآءُ أَصَبْنَٰهُم بِذُنُوبِهِمْ وَنَطْبَعُ عَلَىٰ قُلُوبِهِمْ فَهُمْ لَا يَسْمَعُونَ
A-wa lam yahdi lilladhīna yarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihā an law nashāʾu aṣabnāhum bi-dhunūbihim wa naṭbaʿu ʿalā qulūbihim fa-hum lā yasmaʿūn · Tilka'l-qurā naquṣṣu ʿalayka min anbāʾihā, wa laqad jāʾathum rusuluhum bi'l-bayyināti fa-mā kānū li-yuʾminū bimā kadhdhabū min qabl, kadhālika yaṭbaʿu'llāhu ʿalā qulūbi'l-kāfirīn · Wa mā wajadnā li-aktharihim min ʿahd, wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn
"Has it not been made plain to those who inherit a land after its former people that, if We willed, We could strike them for their sins and set a seal upon their hearts so that they would not hear? · Those are the towns — We recount to you something of their tidings. Their messengers did come to them with clear proofs; but they were not going to believe in what they had called a lie before. Thus does God set a seal upon the hearts of the deniers. · In most of them We found no keeping of a covenant; most of them We found to be transgressors."
| Verse | Who after whom | Expression |
|---|---|---|
| 69 | ʿĀd, after the people of Noah | Jaʿalakum khulafāʾa min baʿdi qawmi Nūḥ |
| 74 | Thamūd, after ʿĀd | Jaʿalakum khulafāʾa min baʿdi ʿĀd |
| 100 | The addressee, after all of them | Yarithūna'l-arḍa min baʿdi ahlihā |
That is, the sūra ties to the reader, in a third link, the chain of succession it built in two stories. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
And the tense of the verb must be recorded: yarithūna — the imperfect, the present. The stories are built in the past tense, this sentence in the present.
The root ط-ب-ع: to press a stamp upon a thing, to seal it. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of the stamping of coin and of wax. Ṭabīʿa (nature) is from the same root: what has been stamped on, a settled condition.
And the occurrences of the root in the sūra are countable: 100, 101 — and at 7/40 (in the context of wa kadhālika najzi'l-mujrimīn) other verbs of the same field will be used.
And per the method (Method) a note is required, and I write it plainly: the question of the seal is a field of kalām debate (the relation between the servant's act and divine decree). This commentary takes no side in that debate.
| Order | Verse | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 101 | Fa-mā kānū li-yuʾminū bimā kadhdhabū min qabl — first the calling of a lie |
| 2 | 101 | Kadhālika yaṭbaʿu'llāh ʿalā qulūbi'l-kāfirīn — then the seal |
The verse places the seal after a prior calling of a lie. I record this as an observation about word order; I build no ruling beyond it.
The root ع-ه-د: to guard a thing, to watch over it, to keep one's word. ʿAhd is the word that is given, and within the root lies the idea of "watching over" — a word is given in order to be kept.
And the placing of the word here is worth recording, because the eighth block of the sūra (172-174) will be built precisely on this word: there a testimony will be taken from man.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two blocks: the hundred and second verse says "in most of them We found no keeping of a covenant"; the hundred and seventy-second tells when that word was taken. There are seventy verses between the two, and the sūra sets down the claim first and gives its ground afterwards. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The root ف-س-ق: a thing's coming out of its husk or out of its place. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of a date coming out of its skin (fasaqa'r-ruṭabu). That is, a fāsiq is one who has come out of the place where he should be.
And this word closes the block: wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn. In the section on the structure of the sūra this was recorded as the closing sentence of the sixth block.
ثُمَّ بَعَثْنَا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِم مُّوسَىٰ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَآ إِلَىٰ فِرْعَوْنَ وَمَلَإِي۟هِۦ فَظَلَمُوا۟ بِهَا فَٱنظُرْ كَيْفَ كَانَ عَٰقِبَةُ ٱلْمُفْسِدِينَ
Thumma baʿathnā min baʿdihim Mūsā bi-āyātinā ilā Firʿawna wa malaʾihī fa-ẓalamū bihā, fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mufsidīn · Wa qāla Mūsā yā Firʿawnu innī rasūlun min rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Ḥaqīqun ʿalā an lā aqūla ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqq, qad jiʾtukum bi-bayyinatin min rabbikum fa-arsil maʿiya banī Isrāʾīl · Qāla in kunta jiʾta bi-āyatin fa'ti bihā in kunta mina'ṣ-ṣādiqīn · Fa-alqā ʿaṣāhu fa-idhā hiya thuʿbānun mubīn · Wa nazaʿa yadahū fa-idhā hiya bayḍāʾu li'n-nāẓirīn
"Then, after them, We sent Moses with Our signs to Pharaoh and his notables. But they did wrong in the matter of those signs. See, then, what was the end of the corrupters! · Moses said: 'O Pharaoh! I am a messenger from the Lord of all the worlds. · It is incumbent on me to say nothing about God but the truth. I have brought you a clear proof from your Lord; so send the Children of Israel with me.' · He said: 'If you have brought a sign, produce it, if you are among the truthful.' · So he cast down his staff, and there it was, a plain serpent! · And he drew out his hand, and there it was, white to those who looked!"
The Moses block runs from verse 103 to verse 171: sixty-nine verses. More than a third of the sūra. It was recorded in the section on the structure; here it is treated.
And the point at which the block departs from the earlier ones in respect of pattern must be recorded, and it is a countable datum:
| Element | In the five stories | In the Moses block |
|---|---|---|
| Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh | 4 times | absent |
| Akhāhum | 3 times | absent |
| Al-malaʾ | 5 times | present (103, 109, 127) |
| The name of the addressee | The name of a people (ʿĀd, Thamūd, Madyan) | A single person (Firʿawn) |
That is, the Moses block stands outside the shared opening. The same was recorded for al-Shuʿarāʾ in al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 2: there too the stories of Moses and Abraham stood outside the pattern of the opening. The two sūras make the same exception independently. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts, and I record it as an observation.
A point of word order must be recorded: the verb ẓalama is here made transitive with the preposition bi-.
The expected construction would be fa-ẓalamūhā ("they wronged them"). The lexicographers explain the usage with bi- as either "they did wrong on account of them" or "they behaved wrongfully towards them"; both explanations are transmitted.
And the same construction had occurred in the ninth verse of the sūra: bimā kānū bi-āyātinā yaẓlimūn. The same verb, the same preposition, the same object. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
Two readings are transmitted of the expression at the head of the hundred and fifth verse, and I record it because the difference affects the meaning:
| Reading | Text | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ḥaqīqun ʿalā an lā aqūla | "It is incumbent to say nothing about God but the truth" — this is what falls to me |
| 2 | Ḥaqīqun ʿalayya an lā aqūla | "It falls to me to say nothing about God but the truth" — the ascription is expressly to the first person |
And the work of the sentence must be recorded: the messenger sets out the truth of his word not with a proof but first with an obligation. The proof comes one sentence later: qad jiʾtukum bi-bayyinatin min rabbikum.
ثُعْبَان — the root ث-ع-ب: according to the lexicographers, a great serpent. At 20/20 in Ṭāhā and 26/32 in al-Shuʿarāʾ the difference between this word and the words ḥayya and jānn was tabulated — the Qurʾān uses three different words for the same event. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them.
The one thing that belongs here is which word al-Aʿrāf chooses: thuʿbānun mubīn — the same word as at al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/32.
And a point of word order was recorded at 26/32 in al-Shuʿarāʾ and holds here too: the verse does not describe a transformation. It does not say "the staff turned into a serpent"; it says "he cast it down — and there it was, a serpent" (fa-idhā hiya). The process in between is not in the text. I rely on that treatment.
بَيْضَآءُ لِلنَّٰظِرِينَ — "white to those who looked". And the qualification must be recorded: li'n-nāẓirīn — the whiteness is described with reference to those who look.
I record this as an observation about word order: the second sign is told not, like the first, by the condition of an object, but by what the beholder sees. And at 20/22 in Ṭāhā the same event occurs with the qualification min ghayri sūʾin (not from any defect). Al-Aʿrāf does not give that qualification; Ṭāhā does. This is a difference that can be verified from the two texts.
قَالَ ٱلْمَلَأُ مِن قَوْمِ فِرْعَوْنَ إِنَّ هَٰذَا لَسَٰحِرٌ عَلِيمٌ يُرِيدُ أَن يُخْرِجَكُم مِّنْ أَرْضِكُمْ فَمَاذَا تَأْمُرُونَ
Qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmi Firʿawna inna hādhā la-sāḥirun ʿalīm · Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum, fa-mādhā taʾmurūn · Qālū arjih wa akhāhu wa arsil fi'l-madāʾini ḥāshirīn · Yaʾtūka bi-kulli sāḥirin ʿalīm · Wa jāʾa's-saḥaratu Firʿawna qālū inna lanā la-ajran in kunnā naḥnu'l-ghālibīn · Qāla naʿam wa innakum la-mina'l-muqarrabīn · Qālū yā Mūsā immā an tulqiya wa immā an nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīn · Qāla alqū, fa-lammā alqaw saḥarū aʿyuna'n-nāsi wa'starhabūhum wa jāʾū bi-siḥrin ʿaẓīm
"The notables of Pharaoh's people said: 'This is a sorcerer of knowledge; he wants to drive you out of your land. What then do you command?' · They said: 'Hold him and his brother back, and send gatherers into the cities · to bring you every sorcerer of knowledge.' · The sorcerers came to Pharaoh. They said: 'There is surely a reward for us if we are the victors?' · He said: 'Yes, and you shall certainly be among those brought near.' · They said: 'O Moses! Either you cast, or we shall be the ones who cast.' · He said: 'You cast.' And when they cast, they bewitched the eyes of the people, and struck fear into them, and produced a mighty sorcery."
It was recorded at 26/35 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, and I rely on it: this sentence is word for word identical in two places in the Qurʾān — al-Aʿrāf 7/110 and al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/35. This is a datum that can be verified from the text.
| Sūra | Who speaks the sentence |
|---|---|
| al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/35 | Pharaoh — asking the malaʾ |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/110 | Al-malaʾ — the sentence stands within the words of the notables |
In the classical commentaries it is explained that the sentence in al-Aʿrāf may belong to Pharaoh too, the words of the notables ending in the first half of verse 110. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.
But in both sūras the same fact is recorded, and it is beyond dispute: the decision is not taken alone, a body is consulted. And this accords with the malaʾ backbone of the sūra (tabulated in the section on the structure).
| Verse | Who says it | Who is to be driven out |
|---|---|---|
| 82 | The people of Lot | Akhrijūhum min qaryatikum — Lot and those with him |
| 88 | Al-malaʾ (Madyan) | La-nukhrijannaka yā Shuʿaybu — Shuʿayb and those who believed |
| 110 | Al-malaʾ (Egypt) | Yurīdu an yukhrijakum min arḍikum — the addressees themselves |
| 123 | Pharaoh | Li-tukhrijū minhā ahlahā — the people of the city |
In the first two of the four occurrences the messenger is driven out; in the last two it is claimed that the messenger will drive out the people. That is, the accusation changes direction.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the subjects and objects of the four verses: the sūra uses the same verb both as a threat and as an accusation; and in the second case what one wants to do oneself is ascribed to the other side. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
And this can be compared with the sūra's sequence of prophets. It was recorded in al-Shuʿarāʾ Table 3: in al-Shuʿarāʾ the third item of the shared threefold entry of five prophets was wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin ("I ask you no fee for this"). I rely on that treatment.
| Who | Fee |
|---|---|
| The messengers (al-Shuʿarāʾ) | Wa mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajr — I do not ask |
| The sorcerers (al-Aʿrāf 7/113) | Inna lanā la-ajran — we do ask |
The same word, the reverse direction. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the word in the two texts.
And what the reward is must be recorded: wa innakum la-mina'l-muqarrabīn — "you shall be among those brought near". What is given is not goods but standing.
This sentence carries a description that must be recorded, and it is important in respect of word order:
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the object of the sentence: the verse does not say that a change took place in an object; it says that the effect was upon the beholder.
And at 20/66 in Ṭāhā the same event occurs in the form yukhayyalu ilayhi min siḥrihim annahā tasʿā ("through their sorcery it seemed to him that they were moving"). The two sūras look the same way: al-Aʿrāf names the eye, Ṭāhā the appearance. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.
وَٱسْتَرْهَبُوهُمْ — the root ر-ه-ب: fear, dread. Form X here states "to frighten, to strike fear". And the same root will return in verse 154: lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn. The same root, one the frightening of people, the other awe before their Lord.
| Half | Construction |
|---|---|
| 1 | An tulqiya — a verbal clause, plain |
| 2 | An nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīn — a nominal clause + the pronoun of separation (naḥnu) + an active participle |
The second half is built more heavily than the first. The lexicographers explain such weighting as a statement of emphasis and of claim.
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the difference of pattern between the two halves: in the offer there is a formal courtesy, but the weight has been placed on their own side.
And Moses's answer is a single word: alqū — "you cast". The same scene is given in three sūras in three different patterns, and this is a countable datum:
| Sūra | The second half of the offer | Moses's answer |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aʿrāf 7/115-116 | An nakūna naḥnu'l-mulqīn | Alqū |
| Ṭāhā 20/65-66 | An nakūna awwala man alqā | Bal alqū |
| al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/43 | (the offer is not named) | Alqū mā antum mulqūn |
In all three the messenger leaves the first move to the other side. The difference is in the addition: Ṭāhā has bal (rather), al-Shuʿarāʾ lengthens the sentence, al-Aʿrāf has a single word.
وَأَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَىٰ مُوسَىٰٓ أَنْ أَلْقِ عَصَاكَ فَإِذَا هِىَ تَلْقَفُ مَا يَأْفِكُونَ
Wa awḥaynā ilā Mūsā an alqi ʿaṣāk, fa-idhā hiya talqafu mā yaʾfikūn · Fa-waqaʿa'l-ḥaqqu wa baṭala mā kānū yaʿmalūn · Fa-ghulibū hunālika wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn · Wa ulqiya's-saḥaratu sājidīn · Qālū āmannā bi-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn · Rabbi Mūsā wa Hārūn
"We revealed to Moses: 'Cast down your staff.' And there it was, swallowing what they had fabricated! · So the truth came out, and what they had done came to nothing. · There they were defeated, and they turned back humbled. · And the sorcerers were cast down in prostration. · They said: 'We believe in the Lord of all the worlds — · the Lord of Moses and Aaron.'"
The root أ-ف-ك: to turn a thing from its direction; and from this, a lie, a fabrication. Ifk — a word turned about, a fabrication.
And the choice of object must be recorded, and this is a point of word order: what is swallowed is not "what they cast" but what they fabricate.
| It could have been built thus | What is built |
|---|---|
| Talqafu mā alqaw — swallowing what they cast | Talqafu mā yaʾfikūn — swallowing what they fabricate |
I record this as an observation about word order: the verse names not the objects lying there but what they are. And this accords with the description in the hundred and sixteenth verse: there too the effect was on the eye, not on the object.
This sentence was treated at 26/46 in al-Shuʿarāʾ, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment:
It could have said fa-sajada's-saḥaratu ("the sorcerers prostrated themselves"); it does not. The passive voice states that the prostration was not a planned decision but an irresistible response — as though something set them down.
And it was recorded there in addition that al-Aʿrāf 7/120 is in the same pattern. I do not repeat it.
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the separateness of the two verses: the sentence is divided; "the Lord of all the worlds" is said and there it stops, and then in a separate verse it is said whose Lord. The lexicographers record that this addition comes to remove every kind of obscurity from the expression.
| Part | Verse | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 123 | Āmantum bihī qabla an ādhana lakum — the accusation of believing without leave |
| 2 | 123 | Inna hādhā la-makrun makartumūhu fi'l-madīnati li-tukhrijū minhā ahlahā — the claim of a plot |
| 3 | 124 | La-uqaṭṭiʿanna aydiyakum wa arjulakum min khilāfin thumma la-uṣallibannakum ajmaʿīn — the punishment |
The first part is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: the accusation is aimed not at the belief itself but at its being without leave. That is, the matter is framed not as a question of belief but as a question of authority.
The word makr in the second part had occurred in the ninety-ninth verse (a-fa-aminū makra'llāh). The same word, in two different mouths.
مِنْ خِلَٰفٍ — "crosswise": the cutting off of one hand and the opposite foot. It was recorded at 26/49 in al-Shuʿarāʾ: the Qurʾān gives the same threat in the same words at al-Aʿrāf 7/124 and Ṭāhā 20/71 too. I rely on that treatment.
The root ن-ق-م: to find a thing abhorrent and reject it; and from this, to punish, to take vengeance. The root was treated in al-Zukhruf, where this verse was named. I rely on that treatment.
And the construction of the sentence must be recorded: negation + exception (mā … illā). In Arabic this is the most decisive way of reducing a cause to a single point.
That is, the answer does not put the ground of the punishment into the mouth of the other side; it leaves a single ground: faith.
The root ف-ر-غ: to empty a vessel, to pour out all that is in it. That is, what is asked for is not "give us patience" but "pour patience over us" — the picture of a vessel being emptied entire.
I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root. And the second half of the request must also be recorded: wa tawaffanā muslimīn — the demand is not for deliverance but for the keeping of a state.
And the same scene was treated at 26/50-51 in al-Shuʿarāʾ. There the answer took the form lā ḍayra innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn, and it was found that the pattern of the lā of generic negation (lā al-nāfiya li'l-jins) in the expression lā ḍayra removes the very notion of harm. I rely on that treatment.
The difference that belongs here is this, and it can be verified from the two texts: the second half of the sentence is word for word the same in the two sūras (innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn); al-Aʿrāf does not give the first half (lā ḍayra).
| al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/50 | al-Aʿrāf 7/125 | |
|---|---|---|
| First half | Lā ḍayr — "no harm" | absent |
| Second half | Innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn | Innā ilā rabbinā munqalibūn — word for word the same |
| What follows | Innā naṭmaʿu an yaghfira lanā rabbunā (26/51) — hope | Wa mā tanqimu minnā illā an āmannā (7/126) — a counter-question |
And the word al-Aʿrāf uses is worth recording: munqalibūn — the root ق-ل-ب, "to turn, to be turned over". The same root had been used of the other side in the hundred and nineteenth verse: wa'nqalabū ṣāghirīn — "they turned back humbled". The same verb, two different turnings. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
وَقَالَ ٱلْمَلَأُ مِن قَوْمِ فِرْعَوْنَ أَتَذَرُ مُوسَىٰ وَقَوْمَهُۥ لِيُفْسِدُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَيَذَرَكَ وَءَالِهَتَكَ
Wa qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmi Firʿawna a-tadharu Mūsā wa qawmahū li-yufsidū fi'l-arḍi wa yadharaka wa ālihatak, qāla sanuqattilu abnāʾahum wa nastaḥyī nisāʾahum wa innā fawqahum qāhirūn · Qāla Mūsā li-qawmihi'staʿīnū bi'llāhi wa'ṣbirū, inna'l-arḍa li'llāh yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādih, wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīn · Qālū ūdhīnā min qabli an taʾtiyanā wa min baʿdi mā jiʾtanā, qāla ʿasā rabbukum an yuhlika ʿaduwwakum wa yastakhlifakum fi'l-arḍi fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn
"The notables of Pharaoh's people said: 'Will you leave Moses and his people free to work corruption in the land and to forsake you and your gods?' He said: 'We shall slay their sons and spare their women. We hold overwhelming power above them.' · Moses said to his people: 'Seek help from God and be patient. The earth belongs to God; He gives it in inheritance to whom He wills of His servants. The outcome belongs to those who guard themselves.' · They said: 'We suffered harm before you came to us, and after you came to us.' He said: 'It may be that your Lord will destroy your enemy and make you successors in the land, and then see how you act.'"
| Who | To whom fasād is ascribed |
|---|---|
| The sūra's own command (56) | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā — forbidden to the addressee |
| Shuʿayb (85) | The same sentence — forbidden to Madyan |
| The verse's own verdict (103) | Fa'nẓur kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mufsidīn — of Pharaoh and his notables |
| Al-malaʾ (127) | Li-yufsidū fi'l-arḍ — of Moses and his people |
That is, in the hundred and third verse the sūra ascribes corruption to one side; in the hundred and twenty-seventh it lets the same word be heard in the mouth of the other side.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is that the two verses use the same root: the word is the same, the ascription reversed. The sūra does not interpret this; it leaves the two sentences side by side.
And a like attitude was recorded at 40/26 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin): there too the decision to kill is presented with a ground of protection, and the word in the ground (fasād) was exactly the name of what was being done there. I rely on that treatment; al-Aʿrāf builds the same structure once more.
Several readings are transmitted of this expression, and I record it because the difference affects the meaning:
| Reading | Text | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Wa ālihatak | "you and your gods" — what Pharaoh worships |
| 2 | Wa ilāhatak | "you and the worship paid to you" — the service rendered to himself |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. Both accord with the context of the sūra.
| Part | Expression | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Istaʿīnū bi'llāhi wa'ṣbirū | A command — two verbs |
| 2 | Inna'l-arḍa li'llāh yūrithuhā man yashāʾu min ʿibādih | A ruling — to whom the dominion belongs |
| 3 | Wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīn | A note on the outcome — qualified |
And the qualification of the third part must be recorded: li'l-muttaqīn — "those who guard themselves". It does not say "yours".
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the word itself: the promise is tied not to a community but to an attribute. And this is the in-text counterpart of the principle recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra: what is described is an attribute.
And the same qualification is built once more, and even more plainly, in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse: wa yastakhlifakum fi'l-arḍi fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn — "and then see how you act".
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the second half of the sentence: the promise is not a promise of unconditional supremacy. Succession is announced, and immediately after it a sentence of observation is placed. That is, deliverance is given not as the end of the test but as the beginning of a new one.
And the later verses of the sūra confirm this: at 138 the demand for a calf, at 148 the calf, at 163 the Sabbath, at 169 the condition of those who took over the Book. The sūra goes on telling what came after the deliverance.
وَلَقَدْ أَخَذْنَآ ءَالَ فِرْعَوْنَ بِٱلسِّنِينَ وَنَقْصٍ مِّنَ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَذَّكَّرُونَ
Wa laqad akhadhnā āla Firʿawna bi's-sinīna wa naqṣin mina'th-thamarāti laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn · Fa-idhā jāʾathumu'l-ḥasanatu qālū lanā hādhih, wa in tuṣibhum sayyiʾatun yaṭṭayyarū bi-Mūsā wa man maʿah, alā innamā ṭāʾiruhum ʿinda'llāhi wa lākinna aktharahum lā yaʿlamūn · Wa qālū mahmā taʾtinā bihī min āyatin li-tasḥaranā bihā fa-mā naḥnu laka bi-muʾminīn · Fa-arsalnā ʿalayhimu'ṭ-ṭūfāna wa'l-jarāda wa'l-qummala wa'ḍ-ḍafādiʿa wa'd-dama āyātin mufaṣṣalāt, fa'stakbarū wa kānū qawman mujrimīn
"We seized the people of Pharaoh with years of dearth and a shortfall of fruits — that they might take it to heart. · When good came to them they would say, 'This is ours'; and when an ill befell them they took it as an ill omen from Moses and those with him. Take note: their omen is with God; but most of them do not know. · They said: 'Whatever sign you bring us to bewitch us with, we are not going to believe in you.' · So We sent upon them the flood, the locusts, the lice, the frogs and the blood — signs set out one by one. But they were too great for them, and they were a guilty people."
The root ط-ي-ر: to fly, a bird. Ṭiyara is the name of the custom of drawing a good or an ill omen from the direction in which a bird flies. That is, the word names the putting of an observation in the place of a decision.
The same root was treated at 27/47 in al-Naml (iṭṭayyarnā bika wa bi-man maʿak — Thamūd, of Ṣāliḥ), where a table was drawn up; al-Aʿrāf 7/131 was named in that table. I rely on that treatment.
The verse does not say "there is no such thing as an ill omen". It takes the word and changes its place: ṭāʾir — "what flies, one's share of fortune" — is with God.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the construction of the sentence: what is objected to is not the search for a cause itself, but the placing of the cause in the wrong place. And innamā (the particle of restriction) fixes the cause at a single point.
And the first half of the sentence must also be recorded, and it is an observation about human behaviour:
| What comes | What is said |
|---|---|
| Al-ḥasana (good) | Lanā hādhih — "this is ours" |
| Sayyiʾa (ill) | Yaṭṭayyarū bi-Mūsā — it is attached to someone else |
What is good is ascribed to oneself, what is ill to the other side. This is a structure that can be verified from the text, and the verse gives it as a diagnosis.
I enter a note as a connection with the social sciences, and I give it with the qualification "this is one way of looking at it" (Method): the tendency to attribute success to oneself and failure to external factors is a pattern that has been observed and named in social psychology. It is an observation that overlaps with the attitude the verse describes; the verse does not set it up as a theory, it tells it as the behaviour of a community. I give this as a possible connection, not as a proof.
The hundred and thirty-second verse is the plainest statement of closedness to be recorded in the sūra:
The sentence is a conditional pattern, and the scope of the condition is left without limit: mahmā — "whatever you bring".
I record this as an observation about word order: the refusal is given before the proof that is to come. That is, the content of the proof is placed outside discussion.
And the same attitude was treated at 41/5 in Fuṣṣilat (qulūbunā fī akinnatin … fa'mal innanā ʿāmilūn), where the addressees' declaring themselves closed was recorded. I rely on that treatment and record the difference in al-Aʿrāf: in Fuṣṣilat the closedness was stated as a condition, in al-Aʿrāf as a decision.
| Word | Root | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| ٱلطُّوفَان | ط-و-ف | What encircles and goes round — the lexicographers generally say a flood; the explanation "a calamity that surrounds from every side" is also transmitted |
| ٱلْجَرَاد | ج-ر-د | Locusts — the root means "to strip a place and leave it bare" (ajrad — bare) |
| ٱلْقُمَّل | ق-م-ل | There is disagreement about it: it is explained as lice, ticks, small vermin, or grain weevils |
| ٱلضَّفَادِع | ض-ف-د-ع | Frogs |
| ٱلدَّم | د-م-ي | Blood |
What the word qummal denotes is disputed, and I do not impose a preference; it is recorded that the root is tied to the idea of "what is small and numerous".
And the root of the word jarād is worth recording: from the same root comes ajrad (hairless, bare). That is, the name of the locust comes from the scene it leaves behind. This is an observation about the language.
And the qualification the Qurʾān places on this list must be recorded: āyātin mufaṣṣalāt — "signs set out one by one".
The root ف-ص-ل was treated at the fifty-second verse; I rely on that treatment. Here the word takes the five events out of being a single catastrophe and makes them signs distinguished from one another.
I record this as an observation about word order: the verse stresses not the succession of the events but their being told apart.
And per the method I draw a limit: I build no explanation about the historical or natural causes of these five events; the Qurʾān names the events and does not describe their mechanisms. And I do not go the way of comparing them with another religious text so as to equate or to separate them (Method).
The hundred and thirty-fourth and hundred and thirty-fifth verses build a cycle, and the steps of the cycle are countable:
| Step | Verse | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 134 | Waqaʿa ʿalayhimu'r-rijz — the punishment falls |
| 2 | 134 | Udʿu lanā rabbak — mediation is asked of the messenger |
| 3 | 134 | La-in kashafta … la-nuʾminanna laka wa la-nursilanna maʿaka banī Isrāʾīl — two promises are given |
| 4 | 135 | Fa-lammā kashafnā ʿanhumu'r-rijz — it is lifted |
| 5 | 135 | Idhā hum yankuthūn — the word is broken |
The root ن-ك-ث: to untwist a twisted rope, to undo it. Nakatha'l-ḥabl — he untwisted the rope. That is, the breaking of a word is described with the picture of something woven coming undone.
This is the concrete sense of the root and is worth recording: the verse pictures a word as a binding.
And a point of word order must be recorded: idhā hum yankuthūn — the idhā of suddenness (idhā al-fujāʾiyya). In Arabic this particle states the abrupt appearance of an unlooked-for state. That is, the breaking happens not at the end of a process but the moment the punishment lifts.
And the qualification ilā ajalin hum bālighūh must be recorded: the lifting was for a term. The verse gives the lifting not as a pardon but as a respite.
The root ي-م-م: yamm, according to the lexicographers, "the sea" or "a great body of water". It is also recorded that the word passed into Arabic from another language; I claim no certainty.
And the Qurʾān uses two different words for this event: al-baḥr (at 7/138, jāwaznā bi-banī Isrāʾīla'l-baḥr) and al-yamm (7/136). Two words two verses apart, for the same water. This is a countable datum.
And the ground of the drowning is given in the verse, and it is in two parts: bi-annahum kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn.
The root غ-ف-ل: to remain unaware of a thing; and to leave a thing aside and take no interest in it. And the placing of the word here is worth recording: calling a lie is a stance, heedlessness a condition. The two are named together.
وَأَوْرَثْنَا ٱلْقَوْمَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَانُوا۟ يُسْتَضْعَفُونَ مَشَٰرِقَ ٱلْأَرْضِ وَمَغَٰرِبَهَا ٱلَّتِى بَٰرَكْنَا فِيهَا
Wa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūna mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribaha'llatī bāraknā fīhā, wa tammat kalimatu rabbika'l-ḥusnā ʿalā banī Isrāʾīla bimā ṣabarū, wa dammarnā mā kāna yaṣnaʿu Firʿawnu wa qawmuhū wa mā kānū yaʿrishūn
"And We gave the people who had been made weak the easts and the wests of the land We had blessed as their inheritance. The good word of your Lord to the Children of Israel was fulfilled, because they had been patient. And We levelled what Pharaoh and his people had been making and what they had raised up."
This expression was treated at 17/1 in al-Isrāʾ, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment: the blessing is attached not to the soil itself but to what is in it. The same expression is used in the Qurʾān for this region in other places too (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/71, 21/81). I do not repeat it.
And the note that belongs here is this: the verse gives no place-name. Mashāriqa'l-arḍi wa maghāribahā — "the easts of the land and its wests". No border is drawn.
I record this as an observation about word order: the text does not set up a geographical title deed; it states an outcome. And per the method I write plainly: no support for any present-day political claim is to be drawn from this verse. This commentary takes no side in current politics (Method).
And the qualification the verse itself lays down must be recorded: bimā ṣabarū — "because they had been patient". The inheritance is tied not to a lineage but to a conduct. And this lies on the same line as the note wa'l-ʿāqibatu li'l-muttaqīn in the hundred and twenty-eighth verse.
And the note fa-yanẓura kayfa taʿmalūn in the hundred and twenty-ninth verse is at work here too: the sūra will show the same community, a few verses later, asking for a calf (138). The text does not conceal it.
The root ع-ر-ش: to raise a thing up, to build a bower or a vault. The word ʿarsh is from the same root — and it occurred in the fifty-fourth verse.
The same root, two different heights. And a note of tanzīh was entered concerning the first (in the section on 54); the second is levelled to the ground.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two occurrences of the root: the sūra uses a word from the same root both as the announcement of sovereignty and as the name of the structures that are brought down. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
The hundred and thirty-eighth verse comes immediately after the crossing of the sea, and a point of word order must be recorded: there is no verse between the two events.
| Verse | What happens |
|---|---|
| 138a | Wa jāwaznā bi-banī Isrāʾīla'l-baḥr — the sea is crossed |
| 138b | Fa-ataw ʿalā qawmin yaʿkufūna ʿalā aṣnāmin lahum — a people is come upon |
| 138c | Qālū yā Mūsa'jʿal lanā ilāhan kamā lahum āliha — the demand comes |
Three sentences, one verse. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the verse itself: the ground of the demand is not a need but a seeing. Kamā lahum — "like theirs".
And the scene of the calf was treated at 20/88 in Ṭāhā. The difference here must be recorded: at 138 there is as yet no calf; only a demand. The calf will come at verse 148. That is, the sūra puts the demand and its fulfilment in different places, and between them stands Moses's departure (142).
The root ع-ك-ف: to stand constantly by a thing, not to leave it. The root was treated at 20/91 in Ṭāhā and at 26/71 in al-Shuʿarāʾ; I rely on those treatments.
The root ت-ب-ر: to be broken to pieces, to be reduced to fragments. Tibr — unworked, scattered gold. That is, the word carries the idea of "valuable but scattered, without wholeness".
And the construction of the answer must be recorded, and this is a point of word order: before rejecting what is asked for, Moses characterises what is being taken as a model.
| Order | Sentence | What it does |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Innakum qawmun tajhalūn (138) | A diagnosis — the source of the demand |
| 2 | Inna hāʾulāʾi mutabbarun mā hum fīhi wa bāṭilun mā kānū yaʿmalūn (139) | An assessment of the model |
| 3 | A-ghayra'llāhi abghīkum ilāhan wa huwa faḍḍalakum ʿala'l-ʿālamīn (140) | A question — and a reminder |
That is, the answer is in three steps, and the three do different work. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the three verses themselves.
And the word in the third step must be recorded: faḍḍalakum ʿala'l-ʿālamīn. This expression occurs in several places in the Qurʾān of the Children of Israel (al-Baqara 2/47, 2/122; al-Jāthiya 45/16) and was treated at 2/47 in al-Baqara. I rely on that treatment.
And the note entered there holds here too, and I repeat it, because it is required by the method: the expression does not establish a superiority of lineage; it states a means that was given. And the sūra itself will divide this expressly in verses 159 and 168: within the same community groups will be counted, separated out as ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq (159) and minhum dūna dhālik (168). No blanket judgement is issued about an ethnic or religious group (Method).
Wa idh anjaynākum min āli Firʿawna yasūmūnakum sūʾa'l-ʿadhāb, yuqattilūna abnāʾakum wa yastaḥyūna nisāʾakum, wa fī dhālikum balāʾun min rabbikum ʿaẓīm "Remember when We delivered you from the people of Pharaoh, who were inflicting on you the worst of punishment: slaying your sons and sparing your women. In that there was a mighty test from your Lord."
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking transition in the block: the verse passes from the third person to the second.
| Verses | Person | Example |
|---|---|---|
| 137-140 | Third person | Wa awrathna'l-qawma'lladhīna kānū yustaḍʿafūn — "that people" |
| 141 | Second person | Wa idh anjaynākum — "We delivered you" |
This is iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address), and it was treated in many places in the index.
And its work here is worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: the story being told is turned, in a single sentence, directly upon the addressee. And straight after this verse come Moses's departure (142) and the calf (148). That is, immediately after saying "this was done to you", the sūra tells "what you did".
The root ب-ل-و: to try, to test; and to wear a thing out. Balāʾ in Arabic takes in both the good and the ill — "one is tested with bounty as well as with hardship". This was recorded in many places in the index.
And the object of the word here is worth recording: the sentence counts the deliverance itself as a test. This lies on the same line as the two-stage test in the ninety-fifth verse: there hardship and ease, here affliction and deliverance.
وَوَٰعَدْنَا مُوسَىٰ ثَلَٰثِينَ لَيْلَةً وَأَتْمَمْنَٰهَا بِعَشْرٍ فَتَمَّ مِيقَٰتُ رَبِّهِۦٓ أَرْبَعِينَ لَيْلَةً · وَلَمَّا جَآءَ مُوسَىٰ لِمِيقَٰتِنَا وَكَلَّمَهُۥ رَبُّهُۥ قَالَ رَبِّ أَرِنِىٓ أَنظُرْ إِلَيْكَ قَالَ لَن تَرَىٰنِى
Wa wāʿadnā Mūsā thalāthīna laylatan wa atmamnāhā bi-ʿashrin fa-tamma mīqātu rabbihī arbaʿīna layla, wa qāla Mūsā li-akhīhi Hārūna'khlufnī fī qawmī wa aṣliḥ wa lā tattabiʿ sabīla'l-mufsidīn · Wa lammā jāʾa Mūsā li-mīqātinā wa kallamahū rabbuhū qāla rabbi arinī anẓur ilayk, qāla lan tarānī wa lākini'nẓur ila'l-jabali fa-ini'staqarra makānahū fa-sawfa tarānī, fa-lammā tajallā rabbuhū li'l-jabali jaʿalahū dakkan wa kharra Mūsā ṣaʿiqā, fa-lammā afāqa qāla subḥānaka tubtu ilayka wa anā awwalu'l-muʾminīn
"We appointed for Moses thirty nights and completed them with ten more; so the term set by his Lord was completed at forty nights. Moses said to his brother Aaron: 'Take my place among my people, set things right, and do not follow the way of the corrupters.' · And when Moses came at the time We appointed and his Lord spoke to him, he said: 'My Lord! Show me Yourself, that I may look at You.' He said: 'You will never see Me. But look at the mountain; if it stays firm in its place, you will see Me.' And when his Lord manifested Himself to the mountain He made it crumble to dust, and Moses fell down in a faint. When he came to, he said: 'Glory be to You! I turn to You in repentance; I am the first of the believers.'"
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: the term is not stated all at once.
| It could have been built thus | What is built |
|---|---|
| Wa wāʿadnā Mūsā arbaʿīna laylatan | Thalāthīna laylatan wa atmamnāhā bi-ʿashrin fa-tamma … arbaʿīna layla |
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the construction of the sentence: the telling gives the term not as a whole but as a completing. And the verb used confirms it: atmamnāhā — "We completed it"; and fa-tamma — "so it was completed". The same root (ت-م-م) twice.
And the choice of the word layla (night) is worth recording: it counts not "days" but "nights". This is one of the common ways of counting a span in Arabic, and the lexicographers record it separately.
Several explanations of the reason for the division between thirty and ten are transmitted in the classical commentaries. I do not convey them, because I cannot establish the soundness of any of them, and the Qurʾān states no reason (Method). The one thing that can be verified from the text is that the division is there.
| # | Command | Root | What |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ukhlufnī fī qawmī | خ-ل-ف | Take my place |
| 2 | Wa aṣliḥ | ص-ل-ح | Set things right |
| 3 | Wa lā tattabiʿ sabīla'l-mufsidīn | ت-ب-ع | Do not follow the way of the corrupters |
And the opposition of two words must be recorded: aṣliḥ (set right) and al-mufsidīn (the corrupters) — the roots ص-ل-ح and ف-س-د. They are set facing each other in the same sentence.
And this pair had occurred twice earlier in the sūra (56 and 85: wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā). That is, the sūra uses its own measure a third time, this time in the instruction a prophet gives to his brother. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
And the presence of the third command is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: the instruction is not only "take my place"; it carries a prohibition as well. The text does not say the reason for this prohibition, and I invent no reason.
أَرِنِى — the root ر-أ-ي, the imperative of Form IV: "show me". No object is stated; the sentence is not arinī nafsak ("show me Yourself") but only arinī. That the object has been elided is understood from the second clause (anẓur ilayk).
أَنظُرْ إِلَيْكَ — the root ن-ظ-ر: to look, to turn the eye towards something. The verb is in the jussive: it comes as the answer to the request ("show me that I may look").
| Root | Verb | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| ر-أ-ي | Raʾā | To see — it states the outcome |
| ن-ظ-ر | Naẓara | To look — it states the turning, and does not entail seeing |
This verse is one of the most debated verses in the history of Islamic thought, and the debate is a debate of kalām. Per the method (Method) I impose no preference here, take no side, and enter into no polemic. I give the views, together with their grounds, in a table.
The subject of the debate is this: what does the sentence lan tarānī ("you will never see Me") negate?
| # | Reading | Its ground | The difficulty raised against this reading |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Seeing is not possible in this world; the negation looks to this world. The state in the hereafter is not the subject of this verse | The context in which the particle lan is used is this world; no distinction between this world and the hereafter is made in the verse, but the context is this world. And it is argued that there are other verses in the Qurʾān (al-Qiyāma 75/22-23) | The verse sets down no qualification of time; the qualification is brought from outside |
| 2 | Seeing is absolutely impossible; the negation covers every case | That the particle lan states certainty and perpetuity; and the sentence lā tudrikuhu'l-abṣār at al-Anʿām 6/103 | The view that the particle lan states eternal negation is disputed among the lexicographers |
| 3 | What is negated is seeing in the form requested — that is, an encompassing, comprehending vision | That the sentence comes as the answer to the request; and that the example of the mountain is built as a question of withstanding (fa-ini'staqarra) | There is no such qualification in the wording of the sentence |
All three readings have been voiced in the classical sources, and each has its own chain of evidence. I make no preference and set no school's view above another's.
And I write this plainly: this verse has throughout history been a distinguishing question among the schools of kalām. In this commentary it is not said on which side of that division one stands.
| # | Datum of the text |
|---|---|
| 1 | The request comes from a prophet and is refused; but the request is not censured — there is no sentence of rebuke in the verse |
| 2 | The answer is not a plain "no": lan tarānī is said and immediately after it a direction comes — wa lākini'nẓur ila'l-jabal |
| 3 | The measure is tied to istiqrār: fa-ini'staqarra makānahū fa-sawfa tarānī — the condition of being able to stay in place |
| 4 | The mountain cannot stay: jaʿalahū dakkā |
| 5 | Moses's response is a fainting (kharra … ṣaʿiqā), not an objection |
| 6 | His words after coming to are a glorification and a repentance, not a renewed request |
The root ج-ل-و: a thing's coming into the open, the lifting of a covering, brightness becoming visible. In ascribing the word to God, the note entered for the Throne at 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) holds here too: the expression cannot be understood so as to ascribe place, body or removal from one place to another to God. In the classical commentaries two attitudes are transmitted for expressions of this kind, tafwīḍ and taʾwīl; I convey both and impose no preference.
And a point of word order must be recorded: tajallā rabbuhū li'l-jabal — the one addressed by the manifestation is the mountain, not Moses. This is a datum that can be read from the text.
دَكًّا — the root د-ك-ك: to level a thing to the ground, to crumble it. A variant reading is transmitted: dakkan and dakkāʾan. The difference in sense is slight; both mean "shattered to pieces / levelled flat".
صَعِقًا — the root ص-ع-ق: to be struck by lightning; and from this, to faint, to lose consciousness.
The lexicographers and the exegetes dwell on this sentence too, and I give the disagreement in a table:
| Reading | What awwalu'l-muʾminīn means |
|---|---|
| 1 | First in time — the first to believe among his own people |
| 2 | Foremost in rank — at the head of faith |
| 3 | First in this particular matter — "I am the first of those who believe that You cannot be seen" |
And it must be recorded that the same expression occurs at 26/51 in al-Shuʿarāʾ in the mouth of the sorcerers: an kunnā awwala'l-muʾminīn. The same pattern in two places, in two different mouths. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.
قَالَ يَٰمُوسَىٰٓ إِنِّى ٱصْطَفَيْتُكَ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ بِرِسَٰلَٰتِى وَبِكَلَٰمِى فَخُذْ مَآ ءَاتَيْتُكَ وَكُن مِّنَ ٱلشَّٰكِرِينَ
Qāla yā Mūsā innī'ṣṭafaytuka ʿala'n-nāsi bi-risālātī wa bi-kalāmī fa-khudh mā ātaytuka wa kun mina'sh-shākirīn · Wa katabnā lahū fi'l-alwāḥi min kulli shayʾin mawʿiẓatan wa tafṣīlan li-kulli shayʾin fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin wa'mur qawmaka yaʾkhudhū bi-aḥsanihā, sa-urīkum dāra'l-fāsiqīn
"He said: 'O Moses! I have chosen you above mankind with My messages and with My speech to you. So take what I have given you and be among the thankful.' · And We wrote for him on the tablets an admonition about everything and a setting out in detail of everything: 'Take these with strength, and command your people to take the best of them. I shall show you the abode of the transgressors.'"
In these two verses the same verb (أ-خ-ذ) occurs three times, and each time it states a command to take hold:
| Verse | Expression | To whom |
|---|---|---|
| 144 | Fa-khudh mā ātaytuk | To Moses |
| 145 | Fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin | To Moses |
| 145 | Wa'mur qawmaka yaʾkhudhū bi-aḥsanihā | To the people |
And the same pattern will come once more in the hundred and seventy-first verse of the sūra: khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin. That is, the same command at the beginning and at the end of the block.
This command was treated at 2/63 in al-Baqara, where it was recorded; I rely on that treatment: "It is said that to hold the Book in hand requires not a loose contact but a force of grip. What is held loosely does not stay in the hand."
And what belongs here is this, and it connects with the sūra as a whole — I record it as my own reading, and it is not binding: the backbone recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra was "the passing of what was given out of the hand". The command in the hundred and forty-fifth verse is exactly the reverse of that: bi-quwwatin — to hold fast. And in the hundred and seventy-fifth verse the sūra will tell the opposite: the man who slipped out of his signs.
One expression in the hundred and forty-fifth verse draws notice: what the people are commanded is to take the best of the tablets.
| Reading | What aḥsanihā means | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | All that is in them is good; aḥsan here states not a comparison but an attribute | That in Arabic the elative is also used for an attribute without comparison |
| 2 | Between dispensation (rukhṣa) and the stricter course (ʿazīma), to take the higher | That there is a distinction between what the text permits and what it recommends |
| 3 | Between what is commanded and what is merely allowed, to take what is commanded | The application of the same distinction to kinds of ruling |
All three explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I draw no legal rule from this (Method).
The root ص-ر-ف occurs three times in the sūra, and its table was given at the fifty-eighth verse. This is the third occurrence.
And the qualification of the sentence must be recorded: alladhīna yatakabbarūna fi'l-arḍi bi-ghayri'l-ḥaqq.
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the relative clause: the turning away is tied not to a group as a name but to a behaviour. And the word connects with the second block of the sūra: the same root had been used of Iblīs too — fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā (13).
And in the continuation of the hundred and forty-sixth verse a table of seeing and of way is built, and this table is read directly from the text:
| What is seen | What is done |
|---|---|
| Kulla āyatin — every sign | Lā yuʾminū bihā |
| Sabīla'r-rushd — the way of rightness | Lā yattakhidhūhu sabīlā |
| Sabīla'l-ghayy — the way of error | Yattakhidhūhu sabīlā |
Three things are seen, and to the three three different responses are given. And the verb is the same: yattakhidhū (to take up). That is, the verse speaks not of blindness but of choice.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the threefold structure. And the same structure was recorded at 41/17 in Fuṣṣilat (fa'staḥabbu'l-ʿamā ʿala'l-hudā — they preferred blindness to guidance). I rely on that treatment: the two sūras build the same fact with two different words.
وَٱتَّخَذَ قَوْمُ مُوسَىٰ مِنۢ بَعْدِهِۦ مِنْ حُلِيِّهِمْ عِجْلًا جَسَدًا لَّهُۥ خُوَارٌ
Wa'ttakhadha qawmu Mūsā min baʿdihī min ḥuliyyihim ʿijlan jasadan lahū khuwār, a-lam yaraw annahū lā yukallimuhum wa lā yahdīhim sabīlā, ittakhadhūhu wa kānū ẓālimīn · Wa lammā suqiṭa fī aydīhim wa raʾaw annahum qad ḍallū qālū la-in lam yarḥamnā rabbunā wa yaghfir lanā la-nakūnanna mina'l-khāsirīn
"After Moses had gone, his people made out of their ornaments a calf, a body that lowed. Did they not see that it did not speak to them and did not guide them to any way? They took it, and they became wrongdoers. · And when it was brought home to them and they saw that they had gone astray, they said: 'If our Lord does not have mercy on us and forgive us, we shall surely be among the lost.'"
The root ج-س-د. It was recorded in al-Anbiyāʾ, and I rely on that treatment: the lexicographers record a distinction between jasad and jism — jasad is used of a body with no sign of life in it.
The root خ-و-ر: the lowing of cattle. It was recorded at 20/88 in Ṭāhā: the word occurs in the Qurʾān only here and at Ṭāhā 20/88. I rely on that treatment.
The verse gives both in the same sentence: a lifeless body and a sound. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verse's own words.
And how the sound came about is not stated in the verse. Detailed explanations are conveyed in the classical sources; this commentary does not enter into them, because the text does not, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).
The proof the verse builds must be recorded, and it is one of the most concrete measures in the sūra: two lacks are counted.
| # | Lack | Where its counterpart stands in the sūra |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Lā yukallimuhum — it does not speak | 143: wa kallamahū rabbuh — his Lord spoke to Moses |
| 2 | Lā yahdīhim sabīlā — it does not guide to a way | 146: sabīla'r-rushd / sabīla'l-ghayy — the question of the way |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words of the two verses: the verse compares the calf with what was told five verses earlier. There there was speech; here there is none. And the measure is not the look of what is worshipped but what it can do.
And this measure will be repeated and widened in the last block of the sūra (7/191-198): there what those called upon can do will be counted one by one. That link will close there.
This expression is an idiom in Arabic, and the lexicographers dwell on it. Word for word: "it was dropped into their hands". As an idiom its sense is: severe regret and bewilderment.
And the verb's being passive must be recorded: suqiṭa — "it was dropped". Who dropped it is not stated.
I give this as a note about the language, and I convey as transmitted the explanation that renders the picture of the idiom thus: the regretful person biting his hand or striking hand upon hand — the bodily counterpart of regret.
Wa lammā rajaʿa Mūsā ilā qawmihī ghaḍbāna asifan qāla biʾsamā khalaftumūnī min baʿdī, a-ʿajiltum amra rabbikum, wa alqa'l-alwāḥa wa akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīhi yajurruhū ilayh, qāla'bna umma inna'l-qawma'staḍʿafūnī wa kādū yaqtulūnanī fa-lā tushmit biya'l-aʿdāʾa wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn "When Moses returned to his people, angry and grieved, he said: 'How evil is what you have done after me! Were you in haste over the command of your Lord?' He put down the tablets and took hold of his brother's head, pulling him towards himself. [Aaron] said: 'Son of my mother! The people reckoned me weak and were about to kill me. Do not let the enemies gloat over me, and do not place me with the wrongdoing people.'"
This scene was treated in detail at 20/92-94 in Ṭāhā, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:
- Ṭāhā 20/90, by saying min qablu (earlier), puts Aaron's warning back into the telling of the events; that is, when the reader hears Moses's question he already knows the answer.
- The two things Aaron asked of his people (ittibāʿ and iṭāʿa) are expressed in the same words as what Moses asked of Aaron.
- In Ṭāhā the address is yabnaʾumma ("son of my mother"), and it was treated there.
| Ṭāhā 20/92-94 | al-Aʿrāf 7/150 | |
|---|---|---|
| Moses's question | Yā Hārūnu mā manaʿaka idh raʾaytahum ḍallū, allā tattabiʿani, a-fa-ʿaṣayta amrī — a questioning about obedience | Biʾsamā khalaftumūnī min baʿdī, a-ʿajiltum amra rabbikum — a reproach directed at the people |
| The act | (the taking hold is named: akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīh — before 20/94) | Wa alqa'l-alwāḥa wa akhadha bi-raʾsi akhīhi yajurruhū ilayh |
| Aaron's answer | Innī khashītu an taqūla farraqta bayna banī Isrāʾīla wa lam tarqub qawlī — a fear of division | Inna'l-qawma'staḍʿafūnī wa kādū yaqtulūnanī — a statement of want of power |
| The final request | (none) | Fa-lā tushmit biya'l-aʿdāʾa wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn |
That is, the two sūras cut the same scene at two different places. I record this as an observation, and I give it not as a contradiction but as a choice of detail — the same method was recorded at 20/20 in Ṭāhā.
ٱلْأَسَف — the root أ-س-ف. It was recorded at 12/84 in Yūsuf and at 43/55 in al-Zukhruf, and I rely on those treatments: when the word is used of Jacob it means grief, and when it is used of Moses (ghaḍbāna asifā — al-Aʿrāf 7/150; Ṭāhā 20/86) it means grief mixed with anger. I do not repeat it.
And the coming together of two words in al-Aʿrāf must be recorded: ghaḍbāna (angry) and asifan (grieved). Two states are named together.
وَأَلْقَى ٱلْأَلْوَاحَ — and the verb must be recorded: alqā. This is a verb that has already occurred three times in the sūra (7/107: fa-alqā ʿaṣāh; 7/115-116: immā an tulqiya / alqū; 7/117: an alqi ʿaṣāk). The fourth occurrence is here, and its object is the tablets.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the four occurrences of the verb: the same verb had three times been used for the showing of a sign; at the fourth what was given is set down. And it will be taken up again in the hundred and fifty-fourth verse: akhadha'l-alwāḥ. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
لَا تُشْمِتْ بِىَ ٱلْأَعْدَآءَ — the root ش-م-ت: to rejoice at the ill that befalls another. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. This is a countable datum.
And Aaron's last sentence must be recorded: wa lā tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn. This sentence had occurred word for word in the forty-seventh verse of the sūra — in the mouth of the people of al-Aʿrāf: rabbanā lā tajʿalnā maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn.
The same sentence, two different addressees. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and it is added to the repetitions counted in the section on the structure.
A point of word order must be recorded: the prayer begins with himself. Ighfir lī wa li-akhī — first himself, then his brother.
I record this as an observation about word order and build no ruling on it: the order of the sentence is read from the text; its reason is not stated in the text.
And the verse-ending must be recorded: arḥamu'r-rāḥimīn — in the section on the structure of the sūra it was named as one of the short closings scattered among the long verses. The same expression will come once more at 7/155, in the form khayru'l-ghāfirīn, together with its fellow.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ ٱلْعِجْلَ سَيَنَالُهُمْ غَضَبٌ مِّن رَّبِّهِمْ وَذِلَّةٌ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَكَذَٰلِكَ نَجْزِى ٱلْمُفْتَرِينَ
Inna'lladhīna'ttakhadhu'l-ʿijla sa-yanāluhum ghaḍabun min rabbihim wa dhillatun fi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā, wa kadhālika najzi'l-muftarīn · Wa'lladhīna ʿamilu's-sayyiʾāti thumma tābū min baʿdihā wa āmanū inna rabbaka min baʿdihā la-ghafūrun raḥīm · Wa lammā sakata ʿan Mūsa'l-ghaḍabu akhadha'l-alwāḥ, wa fī nuskhatihā hudan wa raḥmatun lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn
"Those who took the calf: anger from their Lord and abasement in the life of this world will reach them. Thus do We recompense those who invent falsehood. · And as for those who do evil deeds and then repent afterwards and believe: your Lord, after that, is indeed forgiving and merciful. · And when the anger fell silent in Moses he took up the tablets. In their writing there was guidance and mercy for those who stand in awe of their Lord."
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is one of the most striking sequences in the sūra: the hundred and fifty-second verse announces a punishment, and the hundred and fifty-third opens a door immediately after it.
| Verse | What is stated |
|---|---|
| 152 | Sa-yanāluhum ghaḍabun … wa dhillatun — punishment |
| 153 | Thumma tābū … wa āmanū … la-ghafūrun raḥīm — the possibility of return |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two verses: the sūra does not close the door after announcing the punishment. And the same structure was present in the second block of the sūra too: Adam broke the prohibition (22), then confessed (23), and the prayer was received.
| Step | Verb |
|---|---|
| 1 | ʿAmilu's-sayyiʾāt — it was done |
| 2 | Thumma tābū — there was a turning back |
| 3 | Wa āmanū — there was belief |
The construction of the hundred and fifty-fourth verse is a place the lexicographers particularly dwell on, and it must be recorded.
| It could have been built thus | What is built |
|---|---|
| Wa lammā sakana ghaḍabu Mūsā — when his anger subsided | Wa lammā sakata ʿan Mūsa'l-ghaḍab — "the anger fell silent in Moses" |
One — the verb used is not "to subside" but "to fall silent". That is, the anger is told of as something that speaks.
Two — the subject of the sentence is al-ghaḍab, not Moses. And the preposition is ʿan (from): the anger departs from Moses.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the choice of verb and the preposition: the sentence pictures anger not as a state belonging to the person but as something that comes and goes. And the lexicographers explain this construction as istiʿāra (a borrowed expression); I convey this explanation as transmitted.
نُسْخَة — the root ن-س-خ: to put one thing in the place of another; and to transfer a text from one place to another (istinsākh). The word here means "what is written".
And the last sentence of the verse must be recorded: the guidance and the mercy are lilladhīna hum li-rabbihim yarhabūn — "for those who stand in awe of their Lord".
The root ر-ه-ب had occurred in the hundred and sixteenth verse: wa'starhabūhum — the sorcerers had struck fear into the people. The same root, two different fears. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
وَٱخْتَارَ مُوسَىٰ قَوْمَهُۥ سَبْعِينَ رَجُلًا لِّمِيقَٰتِنَا فَلَمَّآ أَخَذَتْهُمُ ٱلرَّجْفَةُ قَالَ رَبِّ لَوْ شِئْتَ أَهْلَكْتَهُم مِّن قَبْلُ وَإِيَّٰىَ
Wa'khtāra Mūsā qawmahū sabʿīna rajulan li-mīqātinā, fa-lammā akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu qāla rabbi law shiʾta ahlaktahum min qablu wa iyyāya, a-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala's-sufahāʾu minnā, in hiya illā fitnatuk, tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾu wa tahdī man tashāʾ, anta waliyyunā fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā wa anta khayru'l-ghāfirīn · Wa'ktub lanā fī hādhihi'd-dunyā ḥasanatan wa fi'l-ākhirati innā hudnā ilayk, qāla ʿadhābī uṣību bihī man ashāʾu wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ
"Moses chose seventy men of his people for the time We appointed. When the quaking seized them he said: 'My Lord! Had You willed, You could have destroyed them before, and me with them. Will You destroy us for what the foolish among us have done? This is nothing but Your test. By it You lead astray whom You will and guide whom You will. You are our guardian; forgive us and have mercy on us. You are the best of forgivers. · And write for us good in this world and in the hereafter. We have turned to You.' He said: 'My punishment — I visit it upon whom I will; and My mercy has embraced everything.'"
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence has the qualification minnā ("among us"). That is, the guilty are not cast out; it says "among us".
And the word sufahāʾ had occurred in the sixty-sixth verse — there it was the word of the objection put to Hūd (innā la-narāka fī safāhatin). The same root, two different directions: one an accusation thrown at a messenger, the other a diagnosis accepted for one's own community. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
The sentence is built with the pattern in … illā: the event is reduced to one thing — fitna (a test).
The root ف-ت-ن: to put gold into the fire to learn its purity. This concrete sense of the root was treated at 20/40 in Ṭāhā; I rely on that treatment.
And the continuation of the sentence — tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾu wa tahdī man tashāʾ — opens onto a field of kalām debate. Per the method (Method) I do not enter that debate and take no side.
| # | Datum of the text |
|---|---|
| 1 | The sentence occurs within a prayer, not as the announcement of a ruling |
| 2 | A request follows it immediately: fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā — that is, the speaker does not use the sentence as a statement of helplessness |
| 3 | And the answer is one of the widest sentences in the sūra: wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ |
And the note kept consistently in this field throughout the index holds here too: the expression "whom He wills", if read in the sense of arbitrariness, contradicts the Qurʾān's own language — because the same text describes again and again where mercy and guidance are directed. This note was entered in al-Baqara; I rely on it and do not open the discussion here.
The answer in the hundred and fifty-sixth verse is two sentences, and there is a difference of word order between them. This difference is read from the text:
| Sentence | Qualification | Scope |
|---|---|---|
| ʿAdhābī uṣību bihī man ashāʾ | Qualified — a note of will | Determinate |
| Wa raḥmatī wasiʿat kulla shayʾ | Unqualified | Kulla shayʾ — everything |
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the construction of the two sentences: in the first there is a restriction, in the second there is none.
And the same expression had occurred at 40/7 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin), in the prayer of those who bear the Throne: rabbanā wasiʿta kulla shayʾin raḥmatan wa ʿilmā. It was recorded there: the order puts mercy before knowledge. I rely on that treatment.
The difference between the two verses must be recorded: in Ghāfir the sentence is a prayer (servants speak it); in al-Aʿrāf it is an answer.
This root was treated at 2/62 in al-Baqara, where it was recorded: the Qurʾān uses this root in verbal form, and it occurs at al-Aʿrāf 7/156 in the sense of repentance. I rely on that treatment.
And this is a datum to be recorded for the analysis of the word; no ruling about a community is to be drawn from it (Method).
Alladhīna yattabiʿūna'r-rasūla'n-nabiyya'l-ummiyya'lladhī yajidūnahū maktūban ʿindahum fi't-Tawrāti wa'l-Injīli yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūfi wa yanhāhum ʿani'l-munkari wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāti wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾitha wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum iṣrahum wa'l-aghlāla'llatī kānat ʿalayhim…
The verse counts a series of attributes, and the structure of the series must be recorded: five verbs, two opposed pairs and one single.
| # | Verb | Its opposite |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūf | 2 |
| 2 | Wa yanhāhum ʿani'l-munkar | 1 |
| 3 | Wa yuḥillu lahumu'ṭ-ṭayyibāt | 4 |
| 4 | Wa yuḥarrimu ʿalayhimu'l-khabāʾith | 3 |
| 5 | Wa yaḍaʿu ʿanhum iṣrahum wa'l-aghlāl | (single) |
| Word | Root | Where in the sūra |
|---|---|---|
| Al-maʿrūf | ع-ر-ف | The name of the sūra (al-aʿrāf, 46-48) and 199: wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf |
| Al-ṭayyibāt / al-khabāʾith | ط-ي-ب / خ-ب-ث | 58: al-baladu'ṭ-ṭayyib / wa'lladhī khabutha · 32: al-ṭayyibāti mina'r-rizq |
That is, the hundred and fifty-seventh verse uses together the root of the sūra's name and the words of the two soils in the fifty-eighth verse. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
The root إ-ص-ر: the tie that holds a thing in place, a weight; and from this, a burden. The lexicographers tie the root to the picture of the rope by which a tent is fastened to the ground.
And the choice of the verb is worth recording: yaḍaʿu — "he sets down, he puts off". Not to break or to snap; to set down on the ground.
And I build no legal ruling from this verse and do not name which burden is meant; the Qurʾān here describes an attribute and goes into no detail (Method).
قُلْ يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ إِنِّى رَسُولُ ٱللَّهِ إِلَيْكُمْ جَمِيعًا
Qul yā ayyuha'n-nāsu innī rasūlu'llāhi ilaykum jamīʿan, alladhī lahū mulku's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, lā ilāha illā huwa yuḥyī wa yumīt, fa-āminū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihi'n-nabiyyi'l-ummiyyi'lladhī yuʾminu bi'llāhi wa kalimātihī wa'ttabiʿūhu laʿallakum tahtadūn
"Say: 'O people! I am the messenger of God to you all — of Him to whom belongs the dominion of the heavens and the earth. There is no god but He; He gives life and gives death. So believe in God and in His messenger, the unlettered prophet who believes in God and in His words, and follow him, that you may be guided.'"
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the sharpest transition in the Moses block: up to the end of the hundred and fifty-seventh verse the telling was in the third person; the hundred and fifty-eighth passes with a command qul (say) directly into address.
| Earlier addresses in the sūra | Scope |
|---|---|
| Yā banī Ādam (26, 27, 31, 35) | The human race |
| Yā qawmi (59, 65, 73, 85, 79, 93) | A particular people |
| 158: Yā ayyuha'n-nāsu … ilaykum jamīʿā | Everyone, without distinction |
And the word jamīʿan reinforces this qualification further. This is a datum that can be read from the text.
And that this verse is set inside the Moses block is worth recording. I give this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the place of the verse and the sentence before it: the hundred and fifty-seventh verse was speaking of a group within a community; the hundred and fifty-eighth opens the addressee out to all people. That is, the sūra passes from a narrow ring to a wide one, and does so in the middle of a story.
The exegetes disagree about what the word means in this phrase, and I give the disagreement in a table:
| Reading | What ummī means | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | One who cannot read or write | The tying of the root to the sense "remaining in the state in which he was born"; and al-ʿAnkabūt 29/48, wa mā kunta tatlū min qablihī min kitābin wa lā takhuṭṭuhū bi-yamīnik |
| 2 | One belonging to a community to which no Book had come before | The use of the word ummiyyīn in the Qurʾān for those who are not people of a Book (Āl ʿImrān 3/20, 3/75) |
| 3 | One of the people of Mecca — with reference to the phrase Ummu'l-qurā (al-Anʿām 6/92) | That the name of the city is from the same root |
All three explanations are transmitted; they do not exclude one another. I do not impose a preference.
A point of word order must be recorded: the messenger who is to be followed is described as himself one who believes.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the relative clause: the sentence does not put the messenger in a position apart from the addressee; the same act (belief) is ascribed to him too.
And this connects with the objection in the sixty-third and sixty-ninth verses of the sūra: there it was thought strange that what came should come through rajulun minkum (a man from among yourselves). The hundred and fifty-eighth verse describes the messenger in exactly that position.
وَمِن قَوْمِ مُوسَىٰٓ أُمَّةٌ يَهْدُونَ بِٱلْحَقِّ وَبِهِۦ يَعْدِلُونَ
Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn · Wa qaṭṭaʿnāhumu'thnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamā, wa awḥaynā ilā Mūsā idhi'stasqāhu qawmuhū ani'ḍrib bi-ʿaṣāka'l-ḥajar, fa'nbajasat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā, qad ʿalima kullu unāsin mashrabahum, wa ẓallalnā ʿalayhimu'l-ghamāma wa anzalnā ʿalayhimu'l-manna wa's-salwā, kulū min ṭayyibāti mā razaqnākum, wa mā ẓalamūnā wa lākin kānū anfusahum yaẓlimūn
"And among the people of Moses there is a community who guide by the truth and by it do justice. · We divided them into twelve tribes, as communities. When his people asked him for water We revealed to Moses: 'Strike the rock with your staff.' Twelve springs gushed out from it. Each group knew its own drinking place. We shaded them with the cloud and sent down upon them the manna and the quails: 'Eat of the good things We have provided you.' They did not wrong Us; they were wronging themselves."
This sentence occurs twice in the sūra, in word-for-word identical form, and it was counted in the section on the structure. Here it is treated:
| Verse | Of whom |
|---|---|
| 159 | Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn |
| 181 | Wa mimman khalaqnā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn |
The only difference is in the set to which the sentence is attached: one a particular people, the other all created beings.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the two verses themselves: the sūra builds the same sentence first for a narrow set and then for the widest.
And the particle min must be recorded: wa min qawmi Mūsā — "some of his people". The sentence does not take in the whole; it separates out a part.
And this is the support that comes from within the text for the principle of Method that "no blanket judgement is issued". The sūra will do the same thing once more in the hundred and sixty-eighth verse: minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik.
A point of word order must be recorded: the same number occurs twice in one verse, and it belongs to two different things.
| What | Expression |
|---|---|
| The tribes | Qaṭṭaʿnāhumu'thnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamā |
| The springs | Fa'nbajasat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā |
And the link of the sentence must be recorded: qad ʿalima kullu unāsin mashrabahum — "each group knew its own drinking place". That is, the equality of the two numbers has a consequence: there is no confusion.
The same event was treated at 2/60 in al-Baqara (fa'nfajarat minhu'thnatā ʿashrata ʿaynā), and there al-Baqara's word was infajarat. In al-Aʿrāf it is inbajasat.
| Sūra | Verb | Root | The sense the lexicographers give |
|---|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/60 | Infajarat | ف-ج-ر | To burst open and flow abundantly — a wide issue |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/160 | Inbajasat | ب-ج-س | To split and seep, to begin to come out — the first issue |
The lexicographers record that these two verbs can be read in sequence: first the seeping, then the abundant flow. I convey this explanation as transmitted and claim no certainty. The difference of root, however, is a datum that can be verified from the text.
قَطَّعْنَا — the root ق-ط-ع, Form II: it states multiplicity — to divide piece by piece. And the same verb will occur once more in the same sūra, at the hundred and sixty-eighth verse: wa qaṭṭaʿnāhum fi'l-arḍi umamā.
| Verse | Into what it is divided | Where |
|---|---|---|
| 160 | Ithnatay ʿashrata asbāṭan umamā — twelve tribes | (no place stated) |
| 168 | Umamā — communities | Fi'l-arḍ — on the earth |
The same verb, two different divisions. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the verb of the two verses.
Wa idh qīla lahumu'skunū hādhihi'l-qaryata wa kulū minhā ḥaythu shiʾtum wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatun wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā naghfir lakum khaṭīʾātikum, sa-nazīdu'l-muḥsinīn · Fa-baddala'lladhīna ẓalamū minhum qawlan ghayra'lladhī qīla lahum fa-arsalnā ʿalayhim rijzan mina's-samāʾi bimā kānū yaẓlimūn
These two verses were treated at 2/58-59 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there: another word was put in the place of the word that had been given; the form is preserved, the function emptied out. I do not repeat it.
What belongs here is the difference of word order between the two sūras, and it can be verified from the two texts:
| al-Baqara 2/58-59 | al-Aʿrāf 7/161-162 | |
|---|---|---|
| The order of the commands | Udkhulū … wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatun | Uskunū … wa qūlū ḥiṭṭatun wa'dkhulu'l-bāba sujjadā |
| The verb of forgiveness | Naghfir lakum khaṭāyākum | Naghfir lakum khaṭīʾātikum |
| To whom it belongs | (unqualified) | Alladhīna ẓalamū minhum — "those of them who did wrong" |
The third row must particularly be recorded: al-Aʿrāf separates out those who changed the word with the qualification minhum ("of them"). In the sentence in al-Baqara this qualification is absent.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the two verses: al-Aʿrāf, in telling the same event, enters a note of division — and this lies on the same line as the notes of division in the hundred and fifty-ninth and hundred and sixty-eighth verses.
رِجْز — the root ر-ج-ز: to tremble, to be shaken; and from this, punishment, filth. The word had occurred twice earlier in the sūra (134, 135: wa lammā waqaʿa ʿalayhimu'r-rijz). There of the people of Pharaoh, here of this community. The same word, two different addressees. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
وَسْـَٔلْهُمْ عَنِ ٱلْقَرْيَةِ ٱلَّتِى كَانَتْ حَاضِرَةَ ٱلْبَحْرِ إِذْ يَعْدُونَ فِى ٱلسَّبْتِ
Wa'salhum ʿani'l-qaryati'llatī kānat ḥāḍirata'l-baḥri idh yaʿdūna fi's-sabti idh taʾtīhim ḥītānuhum yawma sabtihim shurraʿan wa yawma lā yasbitūna lā taʾtīhim, kadhālika nablūhum bimā kānū yafsuqūn · Wa idh qālat ummatun minhum lima taʿiẓūna qawman Allāhu muhlikuhum aw muʿadhdhibuhum ʿadhāban shadīdā, qālū maʿdhiratan ilā rabbikum wa laʿallahum yattaqūn · Fa-lammā nasū mā dhukkirū bihī anjayna'lladhīna yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾi wa akhadhna'lladhīna ẓalamū bi-ʿadhābin baʾīsin bimā kānū yafsuqūn · Fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanhu qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn
"Ask them about the town by the sea: how they broke the Sabbath. Their fish came to them in shoals on the day of their Sabbath, and on the days when they did not keep the Sabbath they did not come. So We were testing them for their transgressing. · When a company among them said, 'Why do you admonish a people whom God is going to destroy or to punish with a severe punishment?', they said: 'As a plea before your Lord, and that they may perhaps guard themselves.' · When they forgot what they had been reminded of, We delivered those who forbade evil, and seized those who did wrong with a grievous punishment for their transgressing. · And when they exceeded the bound in what they had been forbidden, We said to them: 'Be apes, driven away.'"
This event was treated at 2/63-66 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:
"The solution that is transmitted is this: on the Sabbath nets and pools are made ready, the fish go into them, and on Sunday they are gathered. On the Sabbath there was no fishing — technically." "The wording of the prohibition given is preserved while its purpose is cancelled. The prohibition appears to have been kept; the prohibition does not work." "The Qurʾān marks this behaviour in three separate places with three different examples — which means that it is not a single event but a kind that is being described."
I do not repeat it. And the limit recorded at 16/124 in al-Naḥl also holds: the Qurʾān touches on this matter in several places (al-Baqara 2/65, al-Aʿrāf 7/163, al-Nisāʾ 4/154) and goes into no detail. I rely on that treatment.
Al-Aʿrāf gives a piece of information al-Baqara does not, and this is a difference that can be verified from the two texts: in the event there are three groups, not two.
| Group | Verse | What it does | Its end |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 163 | Yaʿdūna fi's-sabt — those who broke the prohibition | Akhadhna'lladhīna ẓalamū (165) |
| 2 | 165 | Yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾ — those who forbade evil | Anjaynā (165) — they were delivered |
| 3 | 164 | Lima taʿiẓūna qawman… — those who found admonition needless | The text does not say |
The outcome of the third group is not stated in the verse. This is a gap that can be verified from the text, and it has been much debated in the classical commentaries.
| View | What became of the third group | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | They are included among the delivered — they did not break the prohibition | Only two groups are named in verse 165: anjaynā and akhadhnā; the third group is not counted among those who broke the prohibition |
| 2 | They are included among those seized — they chose silence | In verse 165 those delivered are named alladhīna yanhawna ʿani's-sūʾ; the third group does not fall under that description |
| 3 | The text is deliberately silent — the outcome is not stated | That the verse counts two groups and does not include the third in the count |
This disagreement is transmitted from the earliest period, and no preference is made in this commentary.
And the answer of the second group must be recorded, and it is one of the most concrete sentences in the sūra:
| # | Ground | What it looks to |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Maʿdhiratan ilā rabbikum | The one who admonishes — his own account |
| 2 | Wa laʿallahum yattaqūn | The one addressed — the possibility of a result |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two grounds: the first ground remains valid even if the result does not come about. That is, admonition is given as an obligation not contingent on the result. And this is the answer to the objection itself: the objection was saying "they are going to be destroyed anyway".
م-ع-ذ-ر — the root ع-ذ-ر: to remove a fault, to offer an excuse. Maʿdhira means "the setting out of an excuse".
The disagreement about this expression was tabulated at 2/65 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there will not be repeated; I content myself with carrying the disagreement over here and tabulating it with its grounds:
| View | What is understood | Ground | Its difficulty |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | A real transformation | The plain sense of the expression; that the command kūnū states a becoming; that it is the view of the majority | The text does not give the detail of the process |
| 2 | A likeness — the becoming ape-like of hearts and conduct, falling into imitation and cunning | The frequency of such expression in Arabic; and that it was voiced in the early period too | That the plain sense of the command kūnū states a becoming |
And the finding recorded at 2/65 in al-Baqara, which holds independently of the two views, holds here too; I rely on it: the animal chosen is not accidental. The ape is the animal that imitates — it copies the appearance and does not understand the function. And that is exactly what was done: the appearance of the prohibition was preserved, its meaning imitated. The punishment is named in the language of the offence itself.
The one new thing that belongs here is the pattern of the verb in al-Aʿrāf, and it is a datum of word order:
| Place | Expression |
|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/65 | Fa-qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/166 | Fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanhu qulnā lahum kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn |
Al-Aʿrāf adds a conditional clause at the head of the same sentence: fa-lammā ʿataw ʿan mā nuhū ʿanh — "when they exceeded the bound in what they had been forbidden". In al-Baqara this qualification is absent.
The root ع-ت-و had occurred in the seventy-seventh verse (wa ʿataw ʿan amri rabbihim — Thamūd). The same root, two different communities. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.
خَٰسِـِٔين — the root خ-س-أ: to be driven off, to be sent away; the lexicographers tie the root to the sound used to shoo an animal away. It was treated at 2/65 in al-Baqara.
وَإِذْ تَأَذَّنَ رَبُّكَ لَيَبْعَثَنَّ عَلَيْهِمْ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ مَن يَسُومُهُمْ سُوٓءَ ٱلْعَذَابِ
Wa idh taʾadhdhana rabbuka la-yabʿathanna ʿalayhim ilā yawmi'l-qiyāmati man yasūmuhum sūʾa'l-ʿadhāb, inna rabbaka la-sarīʿu'l-ʿiqāb wa innahū la-ghafūrun raḥīm · Wa qaṭṭaʿnāhum fi'l-arḍi umamā, minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik, wa balawnāhum bi'l-ḥasanāti wa's-sayyiʾāti laʿallahum yarjiʿūn
"Remember when your Lord announced that He would surely send against them, until the Day of Resurrection, those who would inflict on them the worst of punishment. Your Lord is swift in retribution; and He is forgiving and merciful. · We divided them into communities on the earth. Among them are the righteous, and among them are others than that. We tested them with good things and with ill, that they might return."
A limit in reading this verse, per the method (Method)
This verse has throughout history been made the ground for a great many political and social claims. No such use is made of it in this commentary, and I write that plainly (Method).
Minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik — "among them are the righteous, and among them are others than that."
That is, the verse itself does not allow a blanket judgement to be built about a community. And this note lies on the same line as the note in the hundred and fifty-ninth verse (wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq).
| Verse | Note of division |
|---|---|
| 159 | Wa min qawmi Mūsā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqq |
| 162 | Fa-baddala'lladhīna ẓalamū minhum |
| 168 | Minhumu'ṣ-ṣāliḥūna wa minhum dūna dhālik |
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the particles of the three verses (min, minhum). The sūra divides three times within the same block.
The root أ-ذ-ن: ear; and from this, to hear, to give leave, to proclaim. Form V (taʾadhdhana) here has the sense of a decisive announcement: "to proclaim something upon oneself".
And the verb had occurred once more in the sūra, in the forty-fourth verse: fa-adhdhana muʾadhdhinun baynahum. The same root, one a proclamation in the scene of the hereafter, the other an announcement here.
| Sentence | Construction |
|---|---|
| La-sarīʿu'l-ʿiqāb | Inna rabbaka — "your Lord" |
| La-ghafūrun raḥīm | Wa innahū — with a fresh inna, a separate sentence |
The second attribute is given not by being coordinated with the first but in a self-standing sentence. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the presence of the second inna.
| Verse | Who is tested | How |
|---|---|---|
| 94-95 | Every land to which a messenger was sent | Baʾsāʾ wa ḍarrāʾ → baddalnā makāna's-sayyiʾati'l-ḥasanata |
| 130-131 | The people of Pharaoh | Sinīn wa naqṣ → jāʾathumu'l-ḥasana |
| 168 | This community | Bi'l-ḥasanāti wa's-sayyiʾāt |
In all three the same structure: good and ill together are counted as a test. And in all three the purpose of the test is stated with the same kind of verb: laʿallahum yadhdhakkarūn (130), laʿallahum yarjiʿūn (168).
Fa-khalafa min baʿdihim khalfun warithu'l-kitāba yaʾkhudhūna ʿaraḍa hādha'l-adnā wa yaqūlūna sa-yughfaru lanā, wa in yaʾtihim ʿaraḍun mithluhū yaʾkhudhūh, a-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitābi an lā yaqūlū ʿala'llāhi illa'l-ḥaqqa wa darasū mā fīh "After them came a generation who inherited the Book. They take the goods of this lower world and say, 'We shall be forgiven.' And if the like of those goods comes to them again, they take it too. Was the covenant of the Book not taken from them, that they should say nothing about God but the truth? And they had studied what is in it."
This verse is the place that prepares the passage into the eighth block of the sūra, and it carries three things to be recorded.
One — the word khalf. The root خ-ل-ف: to come behind. The lexicographers record a distinction between khalf (with fatḥa) and khalaf: khalaf is generally used of a good successor, khalf of a bad one. This distinction is not certain and does not hold everywhere; I convey it as transmitted.
And the same root had occurred twice more in the sūra: jaʿalakum khulafāʾa (69, 74) — there in a positive sense. The same root, two different directions.
The root ع-ر-ض: breadth; and from this, what comes past from one side. ʿAraḍ is what does not last, what is passing. And the lexicographers use the word as the opposite of jawhar (what abides).
The root أ-د-ن-و: nearness; and from this, lowness, baseness. Adnā means both "nearest" and "lowest"; and the word dunyā is from the same root.
That is, the phrase states transience twice over: ʿaraḍ (what passes by) and adnā (what is near, what stays low).
A point of word order must be recorded: the verb is passive and in the future. It is not said who will forgive; forgiveness is voiced as an expectation.
And the verse sets beside this expectation a note of persistence: wa in yaʾtihim ʿaraḍun mithluhū yaʾkhudhūh — "if it comes again they take it again".
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two sentences standing side by side: the verse names in the same place the expectation of forgiveness and the continuation of the behaviour. And then a question comes: a-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitāb.
And this question is the door of the eighth block of the sūra: in the hundred and seventy-second verse a far older covenant will be told.
And the verb darasū must be recorded: the root د-ر-س — to read a text over and over and to work on it; and for a trace to be effaced and vanish. The root has two branches, and both are transmitted.
I record this as an observation: the verse does not leave ignorance as a ground — it says wa darasū mā fīh. The knowledge was there.
Wa'lladhīna yumassikūna bi'l-kitābi wa aqāmu'ṣ-ṣalāta innā lā nuḍīʿu ajra'l-muṣliḥīn · Wa idh nataqna'l-jabala fawqahum ka-annahū ẓullatun wa ẓannū annahū wāqiʿun bihim, khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin wa'dhkurū mā fīhi laʿallakum tattaqūn
The hundred and seventieth verse is set against the hundred and sixty-ninth, and the contrast is in the verb:
| Verse | Verb | Object |
|---|---|---|
| 169 | Yaʾkhudhūna — they take | ʿAraḍa hādha'l-adnā — passing goods |
| 170 | Yumassikūna — they hold fast | Bi'l-kitāb |
The root م-س-ك: to hold, to keep in hand. Form II (tamassuk) here states a firm grip; and a variant reading is transmitted: yumsikūna (Form IV). The difference in sense is slight.
I record this as an observation about word order: the two verses use two verbs from the same field, and their objects differ.
The root ن-ت-ق: to pull a thing from its place and lift it with a shaking. The lexicographers tie the word to the picture of a sack being shaken out.
And this scene was treated at 2/63 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment. What belongs here is what al-Aʿrāf adds, and this is a difference that can be verified from the two texts:
| Sūra | Expression | What is added |
|---|---|---|
| al-Baqara 2/63 | Wa rafaʿnā fawqakumu'ṭ-Ṭūr | — |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/171 | Wa idh nataqna'l-jabala fawqahum ka-annahū ẓullatun wa ẓannū annahū wāqiʿun bihim | A likeness (ẓulla) and a note of inner state (ẓannū) |
And the command is the same: khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin. These are the same words as the command spoken to Moses in the hundred and forty-fifth verse.
| Verse | To whom |
|---|---|
| 145 | To Moses — fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin |
| 171 | To the community — khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin |
The same command, two different addressees. And the Moses block closes with this command. In the section on the structure of the sūra, laʿallakum tattaqūn was recorded as the block's closing sentence.
وَإِذْ أَخَذَ رَبُّكَ مِنۢ بَنِىٓ ءَادَمَ مِن ظُهُورِهِمْ ذُرِّيَّتَهُمْ وَأَشْهَدَهُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ أَلَسْتُ بِرَبِّكُمْ قَالُوا۟ بَلَىٰ شَهِدْنَآ
Wa idh akhadha rabbuka min banī Ādama min ẓuhūrihim dhurriyyatahum wa ashhadahum ʿalā anfusihim, a-lastu bi-rabbikum, qālū balā shahidnā, an taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn · Aw taqūlū innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim, a-fa-tuhlikunā bimā faʿala'l-mubṭilūn · Wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn
"Remember when your Lord took from the children of Adam — from their backs — their offspring, and made them witnesses against themselves: 'Am I not your Lord?' They said, 'Yes, we bear witness.' Lest you should say on the Day of Resurrection, 'We were unaware of this.' · Or should say, 'Our forefathers associated others with God before us, and we were a generation coming after them. Will You then destroy us for what the followers of falsehood did?' · Thus do We set out the signs in detail, that they may return."
This verse is the second of the three cornerstones recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra (11-25 Adam, 172-174 alast, 175-177 the man who slipped out of the signs). I rely on that treatment.
And the sentence immediately before the verse must be recorded: in the hundred and sixty-ninth verse a covenant was being asked about — a-lam yuʾkhadh ʿalayhim mīthāqu'l-kitāb. The hundred and seventy-second verse tells of a far older covenant, and it begins with the same verb: wa idh akhadha rabbuk.
The same root (أ-خ-ذ), two verses apart, for two different covenants. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.
ظُهُور — the root ظ-ه-ر: the back; and from this, the visible, outer face of a thing. The plural of ẓahr.
ذُرِّيَّة — the lexicographers disagree about its root: ذ-ر-أ (to scatter as one scatters seed) or ذ-ر-ر (to divide into small parts) or ذ-ر-و (to winnow). All three are transmitted; I issue no settled ruling on the root. In sense they all come to the same place: what issues from one origin and spreads.
And the root ذ-ر-أ will occur expressly in the hundred and seventy-ninth verse of the sūra: wa laqad dharaʾnā li-jahannam. This root was undone at 23/79 in al-Muʾminūn, where al-Aʿrāf 7/179 was named. I rely on that treatment.
أَشْهَدَهُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ — the root ش-ه-د: to be present; and from this, to know by seeing, to bear witness. Form IV (ashhada) — "to call to witness".
And a point of word order must be recorded: the testimony is taken about themselves — ʿalā anfusihim. That is, the person is made a witness not about another but about himself.
أَلَسْتُ بِرَبِّكُمْ — the question is built on a negation: a-lastu — "am I not?" In Arabic this pattern is a question of confirmation whose answer is affirmative.
بَلَىٰ — and the word of the answer must be recorded: balā, not naʿam. In Arabic balā is the answer that removes the negation of a negative question. Had naʿam been said, then according to the majority of the lexicographers the negation would have been affirmed.
This is a datum of the language and must be recorded; the difference between the two words is settled in Arabic.
There are two great readings of this verse, and both have been voiced in the classical sources. Per the method (Method) I give the disagreement with its grounds in a table and I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE. This is a field of kalām debate, and no side is taken here.
| Reading 1 — a real address | Reading 2 — a description of the fiṭra | |
|---|---|---|
| What it says | The scene is an event that actually took place: the offspring were brought out, the question was put, the answer was given | The scene is a likeness telling of the manner of man's creation: the question and the answer are the putting into language of the structure man carries |
| Its ground from the text | That the verbs are in the perfect (akhadha, ashhada, qālū); that the particle idh states a past time; that the question and the answer are reported directly | That the purpose of the sentence is given as an taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn — that is, a closing off of an excuse; and that no human being has any such memory |
| Support from within the Qurʾān | That the scene is given with a detailed telling; that it is nowhere characterised as a likeness | al-Rūm 30/30: fiṭrata'llāhi'llatī faṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — that there is a ground upon which man was created |
| The difficulty raised against this reading | The text does not say where or how the event took place; and the question is asked how a forgotten testimony can serve as proof | Reducing the speech in the sentence qālū balā shahidnā to a likeness counts as departing from the plain sense of the wording |
Both readings are transmitted. I do not impose a preference, and I do not use the evidence of one side against the other.
And no report at all is transmitted about this verse in this commentary, because their soundness cannot be established. The detail the Qurʾān does not give is not invented: I write nothing about the place, the time, the manner of the scene, or who was brought out and how (Method).
The link with فِطْرَة — 30/30 in al-Rūm
The within-the-Qurʾān ground of the second reading is 30/30 in al-Rūm, and I rely on that treatment. A summary of what was recorded there:
Fiṭra is not "creation" but "the manner of creation". The word names not man's having been brought into being but the fashion upon which he was brought into being. And the verse explains this itself: allatī faṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — "upon which He created mankind". The particle ʿalā — upon: it states a ground.
| al-Rūm 30/30 | al-Aʿrāf 7/172 | |
|---|---|---|
| What is stated | A ground upon which man was created | A testimony taken from man |
| Particle / pattern | Faṭara'n-nāsa ʿalayhā — upon it | Ashhadahum ʿalā anfusihim — against themselves |
| Its permanence | Lā tabdīla li-khalqi'llāh | An taqūlū yawma'l-qiyāmati innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn — the excuse is closed |
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the patterns of the two verses. This observation appears to support the second reading; but I do not present it as a preference — those who hold the first reading also draw a link between this verse and alast, and explain the fiṭra as the trace the testimony taken has left in man. Both readings can make use of this verse.
And independently of the debate, the purpose the verse itself states is read from the text and is not disputed. This is the main thing to be recorded:
| # | The excuse that is closed | Verse |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | We were unaware — innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn | 172 |
| 2 | Our forefathers did it — innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu wa kunnā dhurriyyatan min baʿdihim | 173 |
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 28 | Qālū wajadnā ʿalayhā ābāʾanā wa'llāhu amaranā bihā |
| 70 | Wa nadhara mā kāna yaʿbudu ābāʾunā |
| 173 | Innamā ashraka ābāʾunā min qablu |
Three occurrences. And the hundred and seventy-third verse carries this excuse into the scene of the hereafter and closes it there.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word shared by the three verses (ābāʾ): the ground "our forefathers used to do it", repeated throughout the sūra, is declared invalid in advance in the hundred and seventy-third verse. And the ground is tied to the sūra's own backbone: knowledge was given, no excuse remains.
And the closing of the hundred and seventy-fourth verse must be recorded: wa kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti wa laʿallahum yarjiʿūn. The same verb had occurred in the thirty-second verse of the sūra too (kadhālika nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāti li-qawmin yaʿlamūn). The table at the fifty-second verse is completed here.
وَٱتْلُ عَلَيْهِمْ نَبَأَ ٱلَّذِىٓ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُ ءَايَٰتِنَا فَٱنسَلَخَ مِنْهَا فَأَتْبَعَهُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ فَكَانَ مِنَ ٱلْغَاوِينَ
Wa'tlu ʿalayhim nabaʾa'lladhī ātaynāhu āyātinā fa'nsalakha minhā fa-atbaʿahu'sh-shayṭānu fa-kāna mina'l-ghāwīn · Wa law shiʾnā la-rafaʿnāhu bihā wa lākinnahū akhlada ila'l-arḍi wa'ttabaʿa hawāh, fa-mathaluhū ka-mathali'l-kalbi in taḥmil ʿalayhi yalhath aw tatrukhu yalhath, dhālika mathalu'l-qawmi'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā, fa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣa laʿallahum yatafakkarūn · Sāʾa mathalan i'l-qawmu'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā wa anfusahum kānū yaẓlimūn
"Recite to them the tidings of the man to whom We gave Our signs: he slipped out of them, and Satan took him in tow, and he became one of those who go astray. · Had We willed, We would have raised him by them; but he clung to the earth and followed his own craving. His likeness is the likeness of the dog: if you set upon it, it lolls out its tongue and pants; and if you leave it alone, it lolls out its tongue and pants. That is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies. So tell the story — perhaps they will think. · Evil is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies and were wronging themselves."
A limit per the method (Method) — no name is given
A great many mutually inconsistent reports and names are conveyed about this verse in the classical sources. In this commentary no name is given and no report is transmitted, because:
Two — the names transmitted do not agree with one another, and their soundness cannot be established (Method).
Three — and the verse itself says that the matter does not remain particular to one man: dhālika mathalu'l-qawmi'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā — "that is the likeness of the people who called Our signs lies."
That is, the verse draws a kind out of a single story. This is a datum that can be verified from the text, and the text itself states that looking for a name is unnecessary.
The root س-ل-خ: to separate the skin from the body, to flay. Salakha'sh-shāt — he flayed the sheep. Form VII (insalakha) is reflexive: to slip out, to come out of itself.
And the root's other use in the Qurʾān must be recorded: fa-idha'nsalakha'l-ashhuru'l-ḥurum (al-Tawba 9/5) — "when the sacred months have passed". It was treated in al-Tawba. There the passing away of time, here a man's coming out of the signs.
And the direction of the picture must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse:
| It could have been built thus | What is built |
|---|---|
| Fa-taraka'l-āyāt — he left the signs | Fa'nsalakha minhā — he slipped out of the signs |
That is, the signs are pictured as something worn upon him; and the man comes out of them like a skin.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the concrete sense of the root: a skin is not a thing taken off like a garment — it belongs to the body itself. The picture the root chooses intimates that what is parted with was not something fastened on from outside.
| Verse | Verb | What is taken off |
|---|---|---|
| 22 | Badat lahumā sawʾātuhumā | The covering went |
| 27 | Yanziʿu ʿanhumā libāsahumā | Libās — the clothing is stripped off |
| 26 | Wa libāsu't-taqwā dhālika khayr | Libās — what is to be worn |
| 175 | Fa'nsalakha minhā | The signs — slipped off like a skin |
The sūra uses the picture of putting on and taking off in four separate places. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the four verses.
The root خ-ل-د: permanence, remaining for ever. Form IV (akhlada) here means "to cling to a place, to incline towards it and settle there".
I give this as a note about the word: the word comes from the root of everlastingness and describes clinging to a place that does not last. That is, a search for permanence is directed at a place that is not permanent.
And the first half of the verse must be recorded: wa law shiʾnā la-rafaʿnāhu bihā. The raising too would have been by those same signs (bihā). The same thing can both raise and pass out of the hand.
This likeness is a place that must be undone with care, and it is the point most open to being misunderstood.
The root ل-ه-ث: to loll out the tongue and pant — the breathing of a dog with its mouth open and its tongue hanging out.
And the point at which the likeness works is read from the structure of the sentence itself. This is an indisputable datum of the text:
That is, the point on which the likeness rests is not the dog itself but the fact that the condition does not change. And the structure of the verse says so: two conditional clauses are built and the apodosis of both is given with the same word.
I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the structure of the sentence: the likeness is not a debasement but a description of unresponsiveness. Whatever is done to the man — whether he is set upon or left alone — his behaviour does not change. And this is exactly the description of the signs becoming useless: warning and letting alone give the same result.
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 132 | Mahmā taʾtinā bihī min āyatin … fa-mā naḥnu laka bi-muʾminīn — whatever you bring |
| 176 | In taḥmil ʿalayhi yalhath aw tatrukhu yalhath — whatever is done |
The two verses build the same structure: whatever the input, the output does not change. This is an overlap that can be verified within the sūra.
And per the method (Method) I enter one further note, because this likeness can be used with wounding language: the verse does not turn a group of human beings into animals; it describes a manner of behaving. And the verse itself says who is described: alladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā — an attribute. Whoever carries that attribute is included in it; this is the sūra's own principle.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the likeness is made not to the man but to the case — fa-mathaluhū ka-mathali'l-kalb: "his case is like the case of the dog". On both sides stands the word mathal.
This is the same choice of word order recorded at 47/12 in Muḥammad (yaʾkulūna kamā taʾkulu'l-anʿām — the likeness is made not to the person but to the act). I rely on that treatment.
And the command at the end of the verse must be recorded: fa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣa laʿallahum yatafakkarūn.
The root ق-ص-ص: to follow a trace. Qaṣaṣ is what is told by following its trace. The root had occurred in the seventh verse of the sūra (fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilm) and in the thirty-fifth as well (yaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī).
| Verse | Who tells |
|---|---|
| 7 | God — fa-la-naquṣṣanna ʿalayhim bi-ʿilm |
| 35 | The messengers — yaquṣṣūna ʿalaykum āyātī |
| 176 | The addressee — fa'qṣuṣi'l-qaṣaṣ |
Three links. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
مَن يَهْدِ ٱللَّهُ فَهُوَ ٱلْمُهْتَدِى وَمَن يُضْلِلْ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْخَٰسِرُونَ · وَلَقَدْ ذَرَأْنَا لِجَهَنَّمَ كَثِيرًا مِّنَ ٱلْجِنِّ وَٱلْإِنسِ لَهُمْ قُلُوبٌ لَّا يَفْقَهُونَ بِهَا وَلَهُمْ أَعْيُنٌ لَّا يُبْصِرُونَ بِهَا وَلَهُمْ ءَاذَانٌ لَّا يَسْمَعُونَ بِهَآ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ كَٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ بَلْ هُمْ أَضَلُّ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْغَٰفِلُونَ
Man yahdi'llāhu fa-huwa'l-muhtadī, wa man yuḍlil fa-ulāʾika humu'l-khāsirūn · Wa laqad dharaʾnā li-jahannama kathīran mina'l-jinni wa'l-ins, lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā wa lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā wa lahum ādhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihā, ulāʾika ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍall, ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn
"Whomever God guides, he is the one guided. And whomever He leaves astray, those are the losers. · We have brought into being for Hell many of the jinn and of mankind: they have hearts with which they do not understand, and they have eyes with which they do not see, and they have ears with which they do not hear. Those are like cattle; rather, they are further astray. Those are the heedless."
The root ذ-ر-أ was undone at 23/79 in al-Muʾminūn, where al-Aʿrāf 7/179 was named. I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there: the concrete sense of the root is to scatter as one scatters seed, to multiply; the lexicographers describe the root as lying somewhere between creating and spreading. I do not repeat it.
What belongs here is the function of the lām in the phrase li-jahannama, and this opens onto a debate of kalām. Per the method (Method) I take no side in the debate; I convey the two explanations in a table:
| Reading | What the lām states | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Lām al-ʿāqiba — the lām of outcome: "those who will end up in Hell" | That there are instances in Arabic where this lām states an outcome (fa'ltaqaṭahū ālu Firʿawna li-yakūna lahum ʿaduwwan — al-Qaṣaṣ 28/8: the purpose of the taking in was not enmity) |
| 2 | Lām al-taʿlīl — the lām of purpose | That the primary function of the lām is to state purpose |
Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference, and I do not enter the debate about the decree (Method).
I record the one thing that can be verified from the text, and that is the verse's own continuation: the verse describes these people by a series of attributes — three organs and the non-use of all three. That is, the description is made not by the name of a lineage or a group but by a failure to act.
This triad was treated in eight places in the index, and an eight-link table was drawn up at 16/78 in al-Naḥl. I rely on that treatment and widen the table from here:
| Place | Sentence | The work of the triad |
|---|---|---|
| al-Aḥqāf 46/26 | Wa jaʿalnā lahum samʿan wa abṣāran wa afʾidatan fa-mā aghnā ʿanhum… | Given — of no avail |
| al-Jāthiya 45/23 | Wa khatama ʿalā samʿihī wa qalbihī wa jaʿala ʿalā baṣarihī ghishāwatan | Closed — a seal and a film |
| Fuṣṣilat 41/20 | Shahida ʿalayhim samʿuhum wa abṣāruhum wa julūduhum | They bore witness — the third is the skins |
| al-Sajda 32/9 | Wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūn | Given — no thanks given |
| al-Muʾminūn 23/78 | Wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakumu's-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾida | Brought into being |
| al-Mulk 67/23 | Qul huwa'lladhī anshaʾakum wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūn | Given — no thanks given |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/36 | Inna's-samʿa wa'l-baṣara wa'l-fuʾāda kullu ulāʾika kāna ʿanhu masʾūlā | Held answerable |
| al-Naḥl 16/78 | Wa jaʿala lakum … laʿallakum tashkurūn | Given — thanks hoped for |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/179 | Lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā wa lahum aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā wa lahum ādhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihā | Present — not used |
| al-Anʿām 6/46 | In akhadha'llāhu samʿakum wa abṣārakum wa khatama ʿalā qulūbikum | The possibility of their being taken away |
And what al-Aʿrāf adds lies at two points. Both can be verified from the text, and both set this verse apart from all the other links.
| The other links | al-Aʿrāf 7/179 | |
|---|---|---|
| Order | Samʿ → abṣār → afʾida — from outside inward | Qulūb → aʿyun → ādhān — from inside outward |
At 46/26 in al-Aḥqāf the meaning of the order was recorded: it goes from outside inward — what is heard → what is seen → what is weighed within. In al-Aʿrāf this direction is reversed: the heart comes first.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the order itself: the other verses were telling of the giving of the organs, and the order of giving was from outside inward. Al-Aʿrāf tells of their not being used, and it begins the matter at the heart. That is, the lack is pictured as beginning not at the outer gates but within. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
| Organ | The other links | al-Aʿrāf 7/179 |
|---|---|---|
| The inward | Afʾida / fuʾād / qalb | Qulūb |
| The eye | Abṣār / baṣar | Aʿyun |
| The ear | Samʿ (a verbal noun, singular) | Ādhān (the plural of udhun) |
And the difference must be recorded: in the other verses samʿ is a verbal noun — that is, the faculty of hearing. In al-Aʿrāf it is ādhān: the organ itself.
I record this as a datum of the language: in all three places al-Aʿrāf names the organ and does not use the name of the faculty. And this accords with the work of the sentence: the verse says the organs are there (lahum — "they have") and that they do not work. What is stressed is the presence not of the faculty but of the instrument.
| Organ | Verb | Root | What it states |
|---|---|---|---|
| Qulūb | Lā yafqahūna | ف-ق-ه | To grasp in depth — not to know superficially |
| Aʿyun | Lā yubṣirūna | ب-ص-ر | To see — different from naẓar: it states the outcome |
| Ādhān | Lā yasmaʿūna | س-م-ع | To hear |
That the root ف-ق-ه is chosen is worth recording: the root means to go down into the depth of a thing and understand it; the lexicographers point to a narrower and deeper understanding than ʿilm.
And it was recorded at 26/194 in al-Shuʿarāʾ (ʿalā qalbik) that the Qurʾān ascribes reasoning and understanding to the heart, and this very sentence was named as the example (lahum qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā — al-Aʿrāf 7/179). I rely on that treatment.
| Place | Sentence | What was recorded there |
|---|---|---|
| Muḥammad 47/12 | Yaʾkulūna kamā taʾkulu'l-anʿām | The eating of the animal is not censured; what is described is man's contenting himself with that much alone. And the likeness is made not to the person but to the act. |
| al-Furqān 25/44 | In hum illā ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍallu sabīlā | The ground of the addition bal hum aḍallu: the animal has no way from which to stray. The comparison looks to the non-use of a means that was given. |
And one thing recorded in Muḥammad carries particular weight here, and I need to repeat it, because a reading of the verse that does not wound depends on it: the Qurʾān counts anʿām (grazing livestock) as a bounty in other places, and there is a sūra named for them (al-Anʿām, 6). At al-Naḥl 16/5-8 the creation of these animals is told as a favour.
And the difference between al-Aʿrāf and al-Furqān must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:
| al-Furqān 25/44 | al-Aʿrāf 7/179 | |
|---|---|---|
| What precedes | Am taḥsabu anna aktharahum yasmaʿūna aw yaʿqilūn — two verbs | Three organs, three verbs — a detailed count |
| The likeness | Ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍallu sabīlā | Ka'l-anʿāmi bal hum aḍall |
| Difference | The qualification sabīlā is present | The qualification sabīlā is absent |
| Closing | (it passes to the next verse) | Ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn |
Al-Aʿrāf leaves the word aḍall unqualified and puts a closing sentence in its place: ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn.
The root غ-ف-ل had occurred in the hundred and thirty-sixth verse (wa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn) and had been named in the hundred and seventy-second verse as an excuse (innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn).
And this is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: in the hundred and seventy-second verse heedlessness was being put forward as an excuse; the hundred and seventy-ninth gives the same word as a diagnosis. There are seven verses between the two. That is, the sūra brings back, a few verses later, the name of the excuse it closed, now as an attribute. This is an explanation, not a ruling.
وَلِلَّهِ ٱلْأَسْمَآءُ ٱلْحُسْنَىٰ فَٱدْعُوهُ بِهَا وَذَرُوا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ يُلْحِدُونَ فِىٓ أَسْمَٰٓئِهِۦ سَيُجْزَوْنَ مَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ
Wa li'llāhi'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā fa'dʿūhu bihā, wa dharu'lladhīna yulḥidūna fī asmāʾih, sa-yujzawna mā kānū yaʿmalūn · Wa mimman khalaqnā ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn
"To God belong the most beautiful names; so call upon Him by them. And leave those who twist His names aside. They will be recompensed for what they used to do. · And among those We created there is a community who guide by the truth and by it do justice."
The phrase was treated at 59/24 in al-Ḥashr and named again at 20/8 in Ṭāhā. I rely on those treatments. A summary of what was recorded there:
Lahū has been brought forward, and in Arabic the fronting of the predicate states ḥaṣr (restriction) — "the most beautiful names belong to Him alone". And ḥusnā is the feminine elative of aḥsan: not "beautiful names" but "the most beautiful names".
And it was counted at 20/8 in Ṭāhā: the phrase occurs in four places in the Qurʾān — al-Aʿrāf 7/180, al-Isrāʾ 17/110, Ṭāhā 20/8, al-Ḥashr 59/24. This verse is one of those four.
| Place | The kind of sentence |
|---|---|
| al-Ḥashr 59/24 | A statement — the closing of the sūra |
| Ṭāhā 20/8 | A statement — the sentence closing the opening block |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/110 | A ground — ayyan mā tadʿū fa-lahu'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/180 | A command — fa'dʿūhu bihā |
Two — the relation between 17/110 in al-Isrāʾ and al-Aʿrāf 7/180 must be recorded. It was recorded in al-Isrāʾ, and I rely on that treatment:
In al-Isrāʾ a dispute is being closed — ayyan mā tadʿū fa-lahu'l-asmāʾu'l-ḥusnā: the verse does not equate two names, it says that both go to the same place. And the ground is kept wide: the names are not two but many.
In al-Aʿrāf, however, the same sentence does not close a dispute; it gives a command for use: fa'dʿūhu bihā — "call upon Him by them".
And the place of the command in the sūra must be recorded: the sūra had given a command to pray in the fifty-fifth and fifty-sixth verses (udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan; wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā). The hundred and eightieth is the third command to pray, and this time it says by what one is to pray.
| Verse | Command | What it determines |
|---|---|---|
| 55 | Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan | Bearing and voice |
| 56 | Wa'dʿūhu khawfan wa ṭamaʿā | The inner state |
| 180 | Fa'dʿūhu bihā | By which names |
Three commands, three different determinations. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
The root ل-ح-د: to swerve to one side, to leave the straight and slide sideways. And laḥd (the niche hollowed out in the side of a grave) is from the same root — the picture in the root: not going straight but opening out to the side.
A variant reading is transmitted: yulḥidūna (Form IV) and yalḥadūna (Form I). The difference in sense is slight.
And the particle fī must be recorded: the swerving takes place within the names. That is, the names are not abandoned; a slippage in the use of the names is stated.
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle. This connects with the seventy-first verse of the sūra: there Hūd had named what the other side held as asmāʾin sammaytumūhā antum wa ābāʾukum. The same word (asmāʾ), in two different directions: one names that are given by men, the other names that are given by God.
And the command dharū must be recorded: wa dharu'lladhīna yulḥidūna fī asmāʾih — "leave them". The command is not a command to dispute but a command to withdraw. And this lies on the same line as the command wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn in the hundred and ninety-ninth verse of the sūra.
This verse is word for word identical with the hundred and fifty-ninth; the only difference is in the set to which the sentence is attached. It was tabulated in the section on the structure and treated at verse 159. I do not repeat it.
The one thing that belongs here is the verse's place in this block, and I record it as my own reading, and it is not binding; its ground is the order of the two verses: the hundred and eightieth verse names those who twist the names; the hundred and eighty-first names, immediately afterwards, a community that guides by the truth. Every time, the sūra sets a note of division beside a negative finding. And this has been done four times through the sūra (159, 162, 168, 181).
وَٱلَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا سَنَسْتَدْرِجُهُم مِّنْ حَيْثُ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ
Wa'lladhīna kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā sa-nastadrijuhum min ḥaythu lā yaʿlamūn · Wa umlī lahum, inna kaydī matīn · A-wa lam yatafakkarū, mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna, in huwa illā nadhīrun mubīn · A-wa lam yanẓurū fī malakūti's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa mā khalaqa'llāhu min shayʾin wa an ʿasā an yakūna qadi'qtaraba ajaluhum, fa-bi-ayyi ḥadīthin baʿdahū yuʾminūn · Man yuḍlili'llāhu fa-lā hādiya lah, wa yadharuhum fī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn
"Those who called Our signs lies — We shall draw them on step by step from where they do not know. · I grant them respite. My devising is firm. · Have they not thought? There is no madness in their companion. He is only a plain warner. · Have they not looked into the dominion of the heavens and the earth, and into whatever God has created, and considered that their term may have drawn near? In what account after this will they believe? · Whomever God leaves astray, there is no guide for him; He leaves them in their overstepping, wandering blindly."
The root د-ر-ج: a step, a degree; and to advance step by step. Daraja is from the same root. Form X (istadraja) — to bring someone to a place step by step, without his noticing.
And the qualification set beside the word must be recorded: min ḥaythu lā yaʿlamūn — "from where they do not know".
I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the word builds the picture not of a sudden seizure but of an unnoticed approach. And this accords with the ninety-fifth verse of the sūra: there abundance had been given, and then they were seized suddenly.
كَيْدِى مَتِينٌ — the root م-ت-ن: the strong muscle of the back and loins; and from this, firmness, endurance.
And for the word kayd, the note of tanzīh entered for makr at the ninety-ninth verse holds here too. I do not repeat it.
This verse closes the ring opened in the sixty-third and sixty-ninth verses of the sūra. This link is read from the text:
| Verse | Who | Objection / answer |
|---|---|---|
| 63 | Noah | A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun min rabbikum ʿalā rajulin minkum |
| 69 | Hūd | The same sentence |
| 184 | To the addressee | A-wa lam yatafakkarū, mā bi-ṣāḥibihim min jinna |
The root ص-ح-ب: to be together, to accompany. Ṣāḥib is the one in whose company one is, the one who is known.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the word itself: the answer is given not by a lining up of proofs but by a reminder of acquaintance. The verse says "you know him". And this is the answer to the objection rajulun minkum (a man from among yourselves) in the stories: nearness is counted not as a reason for objection but as evidence.
The root م-ل-ك: to own, to hold command. The pattern malakūt in Arabic states intensity: dominion in its widest and most encompassing form.
It was recorded at 23/88 in al-Muʾminūn: the word occurs in four places in the Qurʾān — al-Anʿām 6/75, al-Aʿrāf 7/185, al-Muʾminūn 23/88, Yā Sīn 36/83. I rely on that treatment.
And the choice of construction must be recorded: a-wa lam yanẓurū fī malakūt — the particle fī (into). Not "to look at" but "to look into".
The phrase was tabulated in al-Muʾminūn, where its regular occurrences in the Qurʾān were counted — al-Baqara 2/15, al-Anʿām 6/110, al-Aʿrāf 7/186, Yūnus 10/11. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it.
And in the section on the structure of the sūra this sentence was recorded as the closing sentence of the eighth block.
يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلسَّاعَةِ أَيَّانَ مُرْسَىٰهَا قُلْ إِنَّمَا عِلْمُهَا عِندَ رَبِّى لَا يُجَلِّيهَا لِوَقْتِهَآ إِلَّا هُوَ
Yasʾalūnaka ʿani's-sāʿati ayyāna mursāhā, qul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda rabbī, lā yujallīhā li-waqtihā illā hū, thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, lā taʾtīkum illā baghtatan, yasʾalūnaka ka-annaka ḥafiyyun ʿanhā, qul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda'llāhi wa lākinna akthara'n-nāsi lā yaʿlamūn · Qul lā amliku li-nafsī nafʿan wa lā ḍarran illā mā shāʾa'llāh, wa law kuntu aʿlamu'l-ghayba la'stakthartu mina'l-khayri wa mā massaniya's-sūʾ, in ana illā nadhīrun wa bashīrun li-qawmin yuʾminūn
"They ask you about the Hour: when will it come to anchor? Say: 'Its knowledge is with my Lord alone. Only He will bring it out at its time. It weighs heavy on the heavens and the earth. It will not come upon you but suddenly.' They ask you as though you had searched it out. Say: 'Its knowledge is with God alone; but most people do not know.' · Say: 'I hold for myself neither benefit nor harm, except what God wills. Had I known the unseen, I would have gained much good, and no ill would have touched me. I am only a warner and a bringer of good news to a people who believe.'"
The root ر-س-و: to be fixed, to settle into place. And the lexicographers use the root for a ship's dropping anchor: arsati's-safīnatu — the ship came to anchor. From the same root comes rawāsī (the firm mountains).
And at 11/41 in Hūd the same root had occurred of a ship (bismi'llāhi majrāhā wa mursāhā). I rely on that treatment.
I give this as a note about the word, and its ground is the concrete sense of the root: the question asks about the Hour not as something that "comes" but as something that drops anchor. That is, what is asked about is the moment at which the event will settle.
| Place | What was recorded |
|---|---|
| Luqmān 31/34 | Inna'llāha ʿindahū ʿilmu's-sāʿa — and five things are counted; the limit of knowledge |
| Fuṣṣilat 41/47 | Ilayhi yuraddu ʿilmu's-sāʿa — the knowledge is referred back to Him |
And what al-Aʿrāf adds must be recorded, and it is a datum of the text: al-Aʿrāf builds the sentence twice, and there is a difference between the two:
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the two sentences themselves. The first answer is given with the messenger's own relation, the second with the name itself.
The root ح-ف-ي: to search a thing out thoroughly, to press on it and come to know it well. Ḥafiyy means "one who knows a thing well by inquiring into it". I record this so that it is not confused with the sense "hidden": the sense given by the majority of the lexicographers here is "one who knows well".
And the sentence thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ must be recorded. The root ث-ق-ل: weight. Several explanations are transmitted of the sense of the sentence (that its knowledge weighs heavy in the heavens and the earth; that the event itself weighs heavy upon the heavens and the earth). I convey them as transmitted and impose no preference.
A point of word order must be recorded, and this is the work of the verse: the limit is set first for the messenger himself.
That is, the sentence does not say "I can bring you no benefit"; it says "I can bring myself none". The widening comes afterwards.
| Condition | Result 1 | Result 2 |
|---|---|---|
| Law kuntu aʿlamu'l-ghayb | La'stakthartu mina'l-khayr — I would have gained much good | Wa mā massaniya's-sūʾ — no ill would have touched me |
The two results run in opposite directions: one gaining, the other avoiding. And the particle law states an unfulfilled condition — it was treated at the ninety-sixth verse.
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the particle: the sentence shows that the unseen is not known by way of two concrete results.
هُوَ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَكُم مِّن نَّفْسٍ وَٰحِدَةٍ وَجَعَلَ مِنْهَا زَوْجَهَا لِيَسْكُنَ إِلَيْهَا
Huwa'lladhī khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥidatin wa jaʿala minhā zawjahā li-yaskuna ilayhā, fa-lammā taghashshāhā ḥamalat ḥamlan khafīfan fa-marrat bih, fa-lammā athqalat daʿawa'llāha rabbahumā la-in ātaytanā ṣāliḥan la-nakūnanna mina'sh-shākirīn · Fa-lammā ātāhumā ṣāliḥan jaʿalā lahū shurakāʾa fīmā ātāhumā, fa-taʿāla'llāhu ʿammā yushrikūn
"It is He who created you from a single soul and made from it its mate, that he might find rest in her. When he covered her she bore a light burden and went about with it. Then, when she grew heavy, the two of them called upon God their Lord: 'If You give us a sound child, we shall surely be among the thankful.' · But when He gave them a sound child they set up partners to Him in what He had given them. Exalted is God above what they associate with Him."
This verse begins with a sentence that returns to the second block of the sūra (Adam): khalaqakum min nafsin wāḥidatin.
And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with a singular scene, then passes to the dual (rabbahumā, ātāhumā, jaʿalā), and then in the hundred and ninety-third verse turns to the plural (yushrikūn, tattabiʿūkum).
| Verse | Person |
|---|---|
| 189a | Singular — nafsin wāḥidatin and its mate |
| 189b-190a | Dual — rabbahumā, jaʿalā |
| 190b-193 | Plural — ʿammā yushrikūn |
This transition is one of the places most debated in the classical commentaries, and I give the disagreement in a table. I DO NOT IMPOSE A PREFERENCE.
| Reading | Who associates partners | Ground | Its difficulty |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Man as a kind — the scene tells not the behaviour of a single couple but of the human species | The verse's passing to the plural (yushrikūn); and that the expression nafsin wāḥidatin can state a kind | The passage from the dual pattern to the plural requires explanation in respect of word order |
| 2 | Later generations — the couple who prayed and those who associate partners are different people | At the end of verse 190 fa-taʿāla'llāhu ʿammā yushrikūn is plural; from 191 on the addressees are plainly others | There is no note of a change of subject in the flow of the sentence |
| 3 | A particular event — it rests on a transmitted account | Reports conveyed in the classical sources | No report is transmitted in this commentary; and the accounts conveyed do not agree with one another |
And for the third reading I write plainly, per the method: accounts have been conveyed about this verse that ascribe a fault to prophets. This commentary does not enter into those accounts, because their soundness cannot be established and the detail the Qurʾān does not give is not invented (Method).
The root س-ك-ن: to become still, for motion to subside; and from this, to find rest, to settle. Sakīna and maskan are from the same root.
And the particle ilā must be recorded: the verb is tied to a direction — "to come to rest towards her".
فَمَرَّتْ بِهِۦ — the root م-ر-ر: to pass, to go to and fro. The sense of the sentence: that while the burden was light she went on with her ordinary life.
وَٱلَّذِينَ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِهِۦ لَا يَسْتَطِيعُونَ نَصْرَكُمْ (192-193) — these two verses are the entry to the long enumeration that will come from the hundred and ninety-fourth verse on, and they will be treated together there.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ تَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ عِبَادٌ أَمْثَالُكُمْ فَٱدْعُوهُمْ فَلْيَسْتَجِيبُوا۟ لَكُمْ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
Inna'lladhīna tadʿūna min dūni'llāhi ʿibādun amthālukum, fa'dʿūhum fa'l-yastajībū lakum in kuntum ṣādiqīn · A-lahum arjulun yamshūna bihā, am lahum aydin yabṭishūna bihā, am lahum aʿyunun yubṣirūna bihā, am lahum ādhānun yasmaʿūna bihā, quli'dʿū shurakāʾakum thumma kīdūni fa-lā tunẓirūn
"Those you call upon beside God are servants like yourselves. Call upon them, then, and let them answer you — if you are truthful! · Have they feet with which to walk? Or hands with which to grasp? Or eyes with which to see? Or ears with which to hear? Say: 'Call your partners, then devise against me and give me no respite.'"
The hundred and ninety-fifth verse counts four organs, and the structure of the enumeration must be compared directly with the hundred and seventy-ninth verse. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and one of the most striking overlaps to be recorded:
| 7/179 — of man | 7/195 — of those called upon | |
|---|---|---|
| Construction | Lahum … lā yafqahūna bihā — the organ is there, it does not work | A-lahum … yamshūna bihā — the question whether the organ is there |
| Heart | Qulūbun lā yafqahūna bihā | (absent) |
| Eye | Aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā | Aʿyunun yubṣirūna bihā |
| Ear | Ādhānun lā yasmaʿūna bihā | Ādhānun yasmaʿūna bihā |
| Foot | (absent) | Arjulun yamshūna bihā |
| Hand | (absent) | Aydin yabṭishūna bihā |
One — the two verses share the same two words: aʿyun and ādhān; and the same verbs: yubṣirūna bihā, yasmaʿūna bihā.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the words shared by the two verses: the sūra applies the same measure to both sides. First to the one who calls: "you have the organs, you do not use them." Then to the one called upon: "do you have organs?" And the measure is one: not what a thing is, but what it can do.
And this measure had already been used in the sūra — at the hundred and forty-eighth verse, of the calf: a-lam yaraw annahū lā yukallimuhum wa lā yahdīhim sabīlā. That is, the sūra builds the same measure in three separate places (148, 179, 195). This is a countable datum.
A point of word order must be recorded: the sentence does not deny the existence of those called upon; it states their standing. ʿIbādun amthālukum — "servants like yourselves".
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the word: what is objected to is not their existence but the work attributed to their standing. And this lies on the same line as the sentence asmāʾin sammaytumūhā in the seventy-first verse: the matter is one of naming.
The root ب-ط-ش: to seize a thing with force, to hold it violently. The choice of the word is worth recording: for "to hold" not a plain verb but a verb stating force has been chosen.
It was recorded at 11/55 in Hūd, and I rely on that treatment: this pattern occurs in other places in the Qurʾān too — thumma kīdūni fa-lā tunẓirūn (al-Aʿrāf 7/195); fa-ajmiʿū amrakum wa shurakāʾakum (Yūnus 10/71). These belong to the same family.
The root ن-ظ-ر here means "to grant respite", and it had occurred in the fifteenth verse of the sūra: innaka mina'l-munẓarīn.
The same root in two different places: in the fifteenth verse respite is granted to Iblīs; in the hundred and ninety-fifth the messenger asks for none. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
And from the hundred and ninety-sixth verse to the hundred and ninety-eighth the enumeration is completed:
| Verse | What is stated |
|---|---|
| 196 | Inna waliyyiya'llāhu'lladhī nazzala'l-kitāba wa huwa yatawalla'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn — who the guardian is |
| 197 | Wa'lladhīna tadʿūna min dūnihī lā yastaṭīʿūna naṣrakum wa lā anfusahum yanṣurūn — they cannot even help themselves |
| 198 | Wa in tadʿūhum ila'l-hudā lā yasmaʿū, wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn — they look but do not see |
And the last sentence in the hundred and ninety-eighth verse must be recorded: wa tarāhum yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn.
This is the coming together in one sentence of the two roots undone at the hundred and forty-third verse (ن-ظ-ر and ب-ص-ر): there is looking, there is no seeing.
I record this as an observation, and its ground is the difference between the two roots: the verse shows within a single sentence that looking and seeing are not the same thing.
خُذِ ٱلْعَفْوَ وَأْمُرْ بِٱلْعُرْفِ وَأَعْرِضْ عَنِ ٱلْجَٰهِلِينَ · وَإِمَّا يَنزَغَنَّكَ مِنَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ نَزْغٌ فَٱسْتَعِذْ بِٱللَّهِ إِنَّهُۥ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ
Khudhi'l-ʿafwa wa'mur bi'l-ʿurfi wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn · Wa immā yanzaghannaka mina'sh-shayṭāni nazghun fa'staʿidh bi'llāh, innahū samīʿun ʿalīm
"Take what is easily borne, command what is recognised as good, and turn away from the ignorant. · And if a prompting from Satan should prompt you, take refuge with God. He is hearing, knowing."
At the centre of the ninth block of the sūra stands a series of three commands, and all three look to a different field:
| # | Command | Field | Direction |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Khudhi'l-ʿafw | His own bearing | Inward |
| 2 | Wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf | What is said to the other side | Outward |
| 3 | Wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn | What is not answered | Withdrawal |
The three commands set up a balance: take, say, withdraw. I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the directions of the three verbs.
ٱلْعَفْو — two branches of meaning, and the difference from 2/219 in al-Baqara
| Branch | Meaning | Where |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | To wipe away, to pardon, to remit a penalty | Widespread in the Qurʾān |
| 2 | What is over and above; the surplus beyond need | al-Baqara 2/219 |
It was recorded at 2/219 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment: wa yasʾalūnaka mādhā yunfiqūna quli'l-ʿafw — "they ask you what they should spend; say: al-ʿafw." The sense the lexicographers gave there was the second branch: what remains over from one's own need. And it was recorded there: "the same question was asked in verse 215, and the answer was given as a list of recipients. Here the same question comes again, and this time a measure is given."
And at al-Aʿrāf 7/199 the exegetes disagree about the meaning of the same word. I give the disagreement in a table and impose no preference:
| Reading | What al-ʿafw is here | Ground |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | To pardon, to forgive — to pass over people's faults | The first branch of the root; and that aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn follows the command |
| 2 | To take what is easy — to ask of people what they can do, not to press them | The "surplus/ease" branch of the root; and that the verb khudh (take) states a taking of a measure |
| 3 | To accept what comes easily from people's dispositions | Another expression of the second reading |
Both of the two great readings are transmitted, and they do not exclude each other. I do not impose a preference.
And the difference of sense between the two verses must be recorded, and it can be verified from the two texts:
| al-Baqara 2/219 | al-Aʿrāf 7/199 | |
|---|---|---|
| Subject | Spending — how much is to be given | Dealing — how one is to behave with people |
| Verb | Quli'l-ʿafw — an answer | Khudhi'l-ʿafw — a command |
| Object | What is over from one's goods | What is easy/pardoned in conduct |
The same word, in two different fields. And in al-Baqara the word is given as a material measure, in al-Aʿrāf as a moral one.
And the same root had occurred once more within the sūra: at the ninety-fifth verse, ḥattā ʿafaw — there in the sense "they grew many". That is, the root occurs twice in al-Aʿrāf, with two different branches. This is a datum that can be verified within the sūra.
The root ع-ر-ف is the root of the sūra's name, and its two branches were tabulated at 46-47. I rely on that treatment.
| Verse | Word | Branch |
|---|---|---|
| 46 | ʿAla'l-aʿrāf | Height |
| 46 | Yaʿrifūna kullan bi-sīmāhum | To recognise |
| 48 | Yaʿrifūnahum bi-sīmāhum | To recognise |
| 157 | Yaʾmuruhum bi'l-maʿrūf | The good that is known and accepted |
| 199 | Wa'mur bi'l-ʿurf | The good that is known and accepted |
Five occurrences, two branches. And the name of the sūra and the command in its last block come from the same root.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the five occurrences: the sūra turns the root from which it takes its name into a command at the end. And the "recognising" branch of the root becomes, in the word ʿurf, "the good that everyone recognises and accepts".
And the difference between ʿurf and maʿrūf must be recorded: both are from the same root and the same field; maʿrūf is a passive participle (what is recognised), while ʿurf is on the pattern of a verbal noun. The hundred and fifty-seventh verse uses maʿrūf, the hundred and ninety-ninth ʿurf. This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
| Place | Sentence | What was recorded there |
|---|---|---|
| al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55 | Wa idhā samiʿu'l-laghwa aʿraḍū ʿanhu … salāmun ʿalaykum lā nabtaghi'l-jāhilīn | The answer is in four parts; and the bearing is given in the context of a response |
| al-Furqān 25/63 | Wa idhā khāṭabahumu'l-jāhilūna qālū salāmā | The answer has come down to a single word; in al-Qaṣaṣ there were three sentences, in al-Furqān only salāmā |
| Place | The kind of sentence | What is given |
|---|---|---|
| al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55 | A statement — the behaviour of a company | Aʿraḍū — the past tense |
| al-Furqān 25/63 | A statement — an attribute | Qālū salāmā — a word |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/199 | A command | Aʿriḍ — a direct command |
That is, the same bearing occurs in the index first as a behaviour, then as an attribute, and here as a command. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the moods of the three verses.
And the word jāhil must be recorded: the root ج-ه-ل, according to the lexicographers' note, carries not only "ignorance" but also the sense of angry and unmeasured conduct. In this second sense the word's opposite is ḥilm (composure), not ʿilm. This distinction is transmitted and accords with the context of the verse: what is commanded is not a dispute about knowledge but a withdrawal.
And the root had occurred earlier in the sūra: innakum qawmun tajhalūn (138) — Moses's diagnosis in the face of the demand for a calf. The same root, in two different places.
The root ن-ز-غ was undone at 41/36 in Fuṣṣilat, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there: to prod, to prick, to come in between and stir up; nazagha baynahum — he set them at odds.
And one thing recorded at 41/36 in Fuṣṣilat belongs directly here, and it was named at 16/98 in al-Naḥl too: the command came immediately after the hardest counsel — there after the command idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan (repel evil with what is better). That is, it was saying where the counsel is most likely to crack.
| Sūra | The command before it | What follows |
|---|---|---|
| Fuṣṣilat 41/34-36 | Idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsan — repel evil with what is better | Wa immā yanzaghannaka … fa'staʿidh bi'llāh |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/199-200 | Khudhi'l-ʿafwa … wa aʿriḍ ʿani'l-jāhilīn — withdraw | Wa immā yanzaghannaka … fa'staʿidh bi'llāh |
In both sūras the same sentence in the same place: immediately after the hardest command. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the order of the two verses.
And the difference recorded at 16/98 in al-Naḥl is at work here too: in al-Naḥl the time of taking refuge was idhā qaraʾta'l-qurʾān (when you recite); in Fuṣṣilat and al-Aʿrāf it is immā yanzaghannaka — when the prompting comes. I rely on that treatment.
And the pattern of the verb must be recorded: yanzaghannaka — it carries the emphatic nūn. That is, what is stated is not a possibility but a case assumed to occur.
And the answer to the command must be recorded: fa'staʿidh bi'llāh — a single step. The verse describes no method of struggle; it gives a command to turn.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوْا۟ إِذَا مَسَّهُمْ طَٰٓئِفٌ مِّنَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ تَذَكَّرُوا۟ فَإِذَا هُم مُّبْصِرُونَ
Inna'lladhīna'ttaqaw idhā massahum ṭāʾifun mina'sh-shayṭāni tadhakkarū fa-idhā hum mubṣirūn · Wa ikhwānuhum yamuddūnahum fi'l-ghayyi thumma lā yuqṣirūn · Wa idhā lam taʾtihim bi-āyatin qālū law la'jtabaytahā, qul innamā attabiʿu mā yūḥā ilayya min rabbī, hādhā baṣāʾiru min rabbikum wa hudan wa raḥmatun li-qawmin yuʾminūn
"When a visitation from Satan touches those who guard themselves, they at once take thought and remember, and then they see. · But their brothers draw them on into error, and never leave off. · And when you do not bring them a sign, they say, 'Why have you not gathered one up yourself?' Say: 'I follow only what is revealed to me from my Lord. This is clear insight from your Lord, and guidance and mercy for a people who believe.'"
| Reading | Text | Meaning |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ṭāʾif | One who circles — who goes round a person watching for an opening |
| 2 | Ṭayf | A passing appearance — what shows itself in sleep or waking |
Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. Both accord with the main picture of the word: something not lasting, but passing by or circling about.
And the measure of the picture is worth recording, and I give it as an observation: in the two hundredth verse there was nazgh (a prod) — a short, sharp contact. Between the hundred and ninety-ninth and the two hundred and first verses the same fact is given in two different pictures: one a prodding, the other a circling about.
A point of word order must be recorded: the idhā of suddenness (idhā al-fujāʾiyya) is used. That is, the seeing comes not at the end of a process but immediately after the remembering.
| Verse | Expression | State |
|---|---|---|
| 64 | Kānū qawman ʿamīn | Blindness |
| 179 | Aʿyunun lā yubṣirūna bihā | The eye is there, the seeing is not |
| 195 | A-lahum aʿyunun yubṣirūna bihā | Is the eye there? |
| 198 | Yanẓurūna ilayka wa hum lā yubṣirūn | There is looking, there is no seeing |
| 201 | Fa-idhā hum mubṣirūn | There is seeing |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the root shared by the five verses (ب-ص-ر): after describing the state of not seeing four times, the sūra says once how seeing comes. And the way given is tadhakkur (taking thought and remembering), not a proof.
And in the two hundred and third verse the word baṣāʾir comes — from the same root: hādhā baṣāʾiru min rabbikum. That is, the root occurs a sixth time at the closing of the sūra, and this time as the name of the Book.
The root ب-ص-ر: to see; and from this baṣīra — to see the inner face of a thing. Baṣāʾir is the plural of baṣīra.
The root ج-ب-ي: to gather a thing together, to pick out and collect. Jabā'l-māʾa — he gathered the water in a pool.
And what the objection is must be recorded: the other side assumes that a sign is something that can be gathered up.
And the answer removes exactly that assumption: innamā attabiʿu mā yūḥā ilayya min rabbī — "I follow only what is revealed to me".
I record this as an observation about word order, and its ground is the opposition of the two verbs: in the objection ijtabā (to gather and select), in the answer ittabaʿa (to follow). One states choosing, the other following.
وَإِذَا قُرِئَ ٱلْقُرْءَانُ فَٱسْتَمِعُوا۟ لَهُۥ وَأَنصِتُوا۟ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُرْحَمُونَ
Wa idhā quriʾa'l-qurʾānu fa'stamiʿū lahū wa anṣitū laʿallakum turḥamūn · Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawli bi'l-ghuduwwi wa'l-āṣāli wa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn · Inna'lladhīna ʿinda rabbika lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatihī wa yusabbiḥūnahū wa lahū yasjudūn
"When the Qurʾān is recited, give ear to it and be silent, that you may be shown mercy. · Remember your Lord within yourself, in humility and in fear, and without loudness of speech, in the morning and in the evening; and do not be of the heedless. · Those who are with your Lord are not too proud to serve Him; they glorify Him, and to Him alone they prostrate themselves."
The root س-م-ع: to hear. Form VIII (istamaʿa) — to give ear, to listen attentively. That is, the command is not "hear" but "give ear".
The root ن-ص-ت: to fall silent, to stop one's voice and listen. Inṣāt — to leave off speaking and settle to listening.
| Command | What is asked | Direction |
|---|---|---|
| Fa'stamiʿū lahū | Giving ear | Positive — something is done |
| Wa anṣitū | Falling silent | Negative — something is left off |
Together the two describe a state. And the particle must be recorded: istamiʿū lahū — made transitive with the lām: the place to which the attention is directed is stated.
And per the method I draw a limit: I build no legal ruling from this verse. Which cases the verse covers (within the prayer, outside it, in which circumstances) has been debated among the schools of law, and no side is taken in that debate (Method).
This verse connects directly with the fifty-fifth verse of the sūra, and that link was recorded at verse 55. Here it closes:
| Verse | Expression |
|---|---|
| 55 | Udʿū rabbakum taḍarruʿan wa khufyatan |
| 205 | Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsika taḍarruʿan wa khīfatan wa dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl |
One — at 55 khufya (secrecy), at 205 khīfa (fear). The two words resemble one another but their roots are different: خ-ف-ي (to conceal) and خ-و-ف (to fear). This is a difference that can be verified from the text.
Two — at 205 a note about the voice is added: dūna'l-jahri mina'l-qawl — "without loudness of speech".
The places in the Qurʾān where the voice is tied to a measure were treated in the index, and I rely on two of them:
| Place | Expression | What was recorded there |
|---|---|---|
| Luqmān 31/19 | Wa'ghḍuḍ min ṣawtik | The particle min states a partitive — the verse asks not for silence but for lowering part of the voice |
| Maryam 19/3 | Idh nādā rabbahū nidāʾan khafiyyā | The opening of the sūra's axis of voice — the prayer was made in a hidden voice |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/110 | Wa lā tajhar bi-ṣalātika wa lā tukhāfit bihā wa'btaghi bayna dhālika sabīlā | Between two extremes — a measure |
And al-Aʿrāf 7/205 is the fourth of this chain. What the four verses share and how they differ can be tabulated:
| Place | How the measure is set |
|---|---|
| Maryam 19/3 | As an example — Zechariah's prayer is told |
| Luqmān 31/19 | As a command — to lower part of the voice |
| al-Isrāʾ 17/110 | As the mean between two extremes — neither shout nor whisper |
| al-Aʿrāf 7/205 | As a limit — dūna'l-jahr: below a raised voice |
All four look the same way, and none of them commands silence. I record this as an observation, and its ground is the words of the four verses.
And the qualification fī nafsika must be recorded: "within yourself". The command determines both a place (within) and a level of voice (dūna'l-jahr).
بِٱلْغُدُوِّ وَٱلْءَاصَالِ — the root غ-د-و: the early time of morning. The root أ-ص-ل: the end of the day, the time from mid-afternoon to evening; the plural of aṣīl.
And these two times are given not as a further ruling of the sūra but as an expression of continuity: the two ends of the day.
The root غ-ف-ل had occurred three times in the sūra (136, 172, 179) and the fourth is here. And the fourth comes as a prohibition.
| Verse | Of whom | Mood |
|---|---|---|
| 136 | The people of Pharaoh | Statement — wa kānū ʿanhā ghāfilīn |
| 172 | The excuse to be pleaded at the resurrection | Quotation — innā kunnā ʿan hādhā ghāfilīn |
| 179 | Those of whom dharaʾnā li-jahannam is said | Diagnosis — ulāʾika humu'l-ghāfilūn |
| 205 | The addressee | Prohibition — wa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn |
Four occurrences, four different moods. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.
This verse is one of the verses of prostration in the Qurʾān. The number of the verses of prostration and which verses fall within them differ among the schools of law; no side is taken in that debate in this commentary and no legal ruling is issued (Method). What is recorded is that this verse is transmitted as one of the verses of prostration, and that note is not disputed.
And the verse's place within the sūra must be recorded, and this is the sūra's most striking closing.
The sūra had opened, in the eleventh verse, with a command to prostrate (usjudū li-Ādama fa-sajadū illā Iblīs) and there there was a making of oneself great (fa-mā yakūnu laka an tatakabbara fīhā — 13).
| Verse | Prostration | Pride |
|---|---|---|
| 11-13 | Usjudū li-Ādam — commanded; one did not do it | An tatakabbara fīhā — pride |
| 206 | Wa lahū yasjudūn — it is done | Lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatih — no pride |
The same two roots (س-ج-د and ك-ب-ر), at the beginning and at the end of the sūra; at the beginning in the negative, at the end in the affirmative.
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the roots shared by the two verses: the sūra opens with the telling of a refusal to prostrate and closes with the telling of those who prostrate. And in between, for two hundred verses, the same matter is worked: the knowledge given, and the response given to it.
And the qualification ʿinda rabbika must be recorded: who is meant is not named. In the classical commentaries it is explained as the angels; I convey this explanation as transmitted and do not name what the text does not name (Method).
| Order | Verb | What |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Lā yastakbirūna ʿan ʿibādatih | Negative — no pride |
| 2 | Wa yusabbiḥūnahū | Positive — glorification |
| 3 | Wa lahū yasjudūn | Positive — prostration |
And in the third verb there is a fronting: wa lahū yasjudūn — the object has been brought forward. In Arabic this states ḥaṣr (restriction): to Him alone.
This section gathers the data recorded through the sūra. I give two tables: the first, repetitions countable and verifiable within the sūra; the second, disagreements left without a preference. The first table is a count, not an interpretation; the places that are interpretation are marked separately.
A first count was given in the section on the structure of the sūra; this table completes it and adds the repetitions that emerged from the sections treated.
| # | Repetition | Verses where it occurs | How many | What it does |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh | 59, 65, 73, 85 | 4 | The shared opening of the sequence of prophets; absent in Lot's |
| 2 | Yā banī Ādam | 26, 27, 31, 35 | 4 | The address of the third block |
| 3 | Fa-akhadhathumu'r-rajfatu fa-aṣbaḥū fī dārihim jāthimīn | 78, 91 | 2 | The word-for-word identical closing of Thamūd and Madyan |
| 4 | Fa-tawallā ʿanhum wa qāla yā qawmi laqad ablaghtukum … wa naṣaḥtu lakum | 79, 93 | 2 | Ṣāliḥ and Shuʿayb; the only difference risālata / risālāt |
| 5 | Wa lā tufsidū fi'l-arḍi baʿda iṣlāḥihā | 56, 85 | 2 | The sūra's own command in Shuʿayb's mouth |
| 6 | Wa yabghūnahā ʿiwajā | 45, 86 | 2 | An attribute in the scene of the hereafter, a prohibition in Madyan |
| 7 | Ummatun yahdūna bi'l-ḥaqqi wa bihī yaʿdilūn | 159, 181 | 2 | For a people, then for all created beings |
| 8 | Lā tajʿalnā / tajʿalnī maʿa'l-qawmi'ẓ-ẓālimīn | 47, 150 | 2 | In the mouths of the people of al-Aʿrāf and of Aaron |
| 9 | A-wa ʿajibtum an jāʾakum dhikrun … ʿalā rajulin minkum | 63, 69 | 2 | Noah and Hūd; at 184 it is turned upon the addressee |
| 10 | Khudhū / khudh … bi-quwwatin | 145, 171 | 2 | The same command to Moses and to the community |
| 11 | Fa'tinā bimā taʿidunā in kunta … | 70, 77 | 2 | ʿĀd and Thamūd; ṣādiqīn / mursalīn |
| 12 | Akhrijūhum / la-nukhrijannaka / yukhrijakum / li-tukhrijū (خ-ر-ج) | 82, 88, 110, 123 | 4 | The threat and the accusation of driving out |
| 13 | Jaʿalakum khulafāʾa and yarithūna'l-arḍ | 69, 74, 100 | 3 | The chain of succession: ʿĀd → Thamūd → the addressee |
| 14 | Nufaṣṣilu'l-āyāt / faṣṣalnāhu / tafṣīl / mufaṣṣalāt (ف-ص-ل) | 32, 52, 133, 145, 174 | 5 | Setting out in detail |
| 15 | Ṣurifat / nuṣarrifu / sa-aṣrifu (ص-ر-ف) | 47, 58, 146 | 3 | Gazes, signs, the proud |
| 16 | Ghāfilīn / ghāfilūn (غ-ف-ل) | 136, 172, 179, 205 | 4 | Statement → excuse → diagnosis → prohibition |
| 17 | Yubṣirūn / mubṣirūn / baṣāʾir (ب-ص-ر) | 179, 195, 198, 201, 203 | 5 | The axis of seeing; four negative, one positive |
| 18 | Nāṣiḥ / anṣaḥu / naṣaḥtu (ن-ص-ح) | 21, 62, 68, 79, 93 | 5 | One in the mouth of Iblīs, four in those of prophets |
| 19 | Aqʿudanna / lā taqʿudū (ق-ع-د) + ṣirāṭ | 16, 86 | 2 | Iblīs's intent, a prohibition to Madyan |
| 20 | Rijz | 134, 135, 162 | 3 | The people of Pharaoh and this community |
| 21 | ʿArsh / yaʿrishūn (ع-ر-ش) | 54, 137 | 2 | Sovereignty and the structures brought down |
| 22 | Tabāraka / barakāt (ب-ر-ك) | 54, 96, 137 | 3 | Loftiness, blessing, a blessed land |
| 23 | Aʿrāf / yaʿrifūna / maʿrūf / ʿurf (ع-ر-ف) | 46, 46, 48, 157, 199 | 5 | The name of the sūra turns at the end into a command |
| 24 | ʿAfaw / al-ʿafw (ع-ف-و) | 95, 199 | 2 | "They grew many" and "take the ʿafw" — two branches |
| 25 | Naquṣṣanna / yaquṣṣūna / fa'qṣuṣ (ق-ص-ص) | 7, 35, 176 | 3 | God, the messengers, the addressee |
| 26 | Munẓarīn / lā tunẓirūn (ن-ظ-ر, respite) | 15, 195 | 2 | What was given to Iblīs, what the messenger does not ask |
| 27 | Sufahāʾ / tajhalūn / jāhilīn | 66, 138, 155, 199 | 4 | The same field, four different directions |
| 28 | Anjaynā | 64, 72, 83, 165 | 4 | The announcement of deliverance |
| 29 | Wa'dhkurū ālāʾa'llāh | 69, 74 | 2 | The shared sentence of Hūd and Ṣāliḥ |
| 30 | Udʿū / wa'dʿūhu / fa'dʿūhu — the command to pray | 55, 56, 180 | 3 | Bearing, inner state, by which names |
| 31 | Prostration and pride (س-ج-د + ك-ب-ر) | 11-13, 206 | 2 | The opening and the closing of the sūra |
| 32 | The note of division (min, minhum) | 159, 162, 168, 181 | 4 | That no blanket judgement is built |
| 33 | The two-directional test (ḥasana + sayyiʾa) | 94-95, 130-131, 168 | 3 | Hardship and abundance together |
| 34 | Alqā / alqū / tulqiya (ل-ق-ي) | 107, 115, 116, 117, 150 | 5 | Four of them a sign, one the tablets |
| 35 | The measure "what can it do?" | 148, 179, 195 | 3 | The calf, man, those called upon — the same measure |
| 36 | Bayātan / ḍuḥan / baghtatan — suddenness | 4, 95, 97, 98 | 4 | The hour of sleep and of play |
And two lines must be recorded separately; both are the result of the count above, and I give them as my own reading, and they are not binding:
One — line 35 is the sūra's most consistent measure. In three separate places, for three different addressees, the same question is asked: what are you doing with what you have in hand / what can it do? Of the calf (148: it does not speak, it does not guide), of man (179: the organs are there, they do not work), of those called upon (195: are the organs there?). The measure changes nowhere.
Two — line 32 is the support that comes from within the text for the principle of Method that "no blanket judgement is issued". Even in the places where it says the harshest things about them, the sūra enters a note of division four times. This is a countable datum and is not an interpretation; only the conclusion I draw from it is interpretation.
In the following places the disagreement was tabulated and NO PREFERENCE WAS IMPOSED. The reason is the same every time: either the Qurʾān states no preference, or the matter falls within a field of kalām debate, or none of the explanations transmitted can be given certainty (Method).
| # | Verse | Matter | How many views tabulated | Kind |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 7/1 | The disconnected letters | — (the note in the index: it is not known with certainty) | A limit of knowledge |
| 2 | 7/46 | What al-Aʿrāf is | 3 | Word / place |
| 3 | 7/46-49 | Who those upon al-Aʿrāf are | 5 (+ two grammatical questions) | Identity |
| 4 | 7/46 | The subject of the sentence lam yadkhulūhā | 2 | Word order |
| 5 | 7/49 | Who speaks the command udkhulu'l-janna | 2 | Word order |
| 6 | 7/46 | The root of sīmā (و-س-م / س-و-م) | 2 | Root |
| 7 | 7/54 | Istawā ʿala'l-ʿarsh — tafwīḍ / taʾwīl | 2 | Of kalām — no polemic entered |
| 8 | 7/55 | Al-muʿtadīn — in supplication or in general | 2 | Scope |
| 9 | 7/56 | Baʿda iṣlāḥihā — who set it right | (not named) | A gap |
| 10 | 7/57 | The reading of bushran (nushran, nashran) | 2+ | A variant reading |
| 11 | 7/58 | That the qualification bi-idhni rabbih stands on only one side | (no explanation given) | Word order |
| 12 | 7/80 | The dropping of akhāhum in the story of Lot | 1 explanation, no certainty | Word order |
| 13 | 7/84 | The distinction amṭara / maṭara | a transmitted distinction, not certain | Language |
| 14 | 7/88-89 | The verb ʿawd — does it require prior presence | 2 | Language |
| 15 | 7/99 | Makra'llāh — a note of tanzīh | the note entered and the discussion closed | Of kalām |
| 16 | 7/101 | The question of the seal | the debate not entered | Of kalām |
| 17 | 7/105 | Ḥaqīqun ʿalā / ʿalayya | 2 | A variant reading |
| 18 | 7/110 | Fa-mādhā taʾmurūn — who says it | 2 | Word order |
| 19 | 7/127 | Ālihatak / ilāhatak | 2 | A variant reading |
| 20 | 7/133 | What qummal is | several explanations | Word |
| 21 | 7/142 | The reason for the division thirty + ten | (no report conveyed) | A gap |
| 22 | 7/143 | The question of the vision — what lan tarānī negates | 3 | Of kalām — no side taken |
| 23 | 7/143 | Dakkan / dakkāʾan | 2 | A variant reading |
| 24 | 7/143 | What awwalu'l-muʾminīn means | 3 | Meaning |
| 25 | 7/145 | What bi-aḥsanihā means | 3 | Meaning / ruling — no legal conclusion drawn |
| 26 | 7/155 | Tuḍillu bihā man tashāʾ | the debate not entered | Of kalām |
| 27 | 7/157 | What ummī means | 3 | Meaning |
| 28 | 7/160 | The difference inbajasat / infajarat | a transmitted explanation, no certainty | Word |
| 29 | 7/164 | The outcome of the third group | 3 | A gap |
| 30 | 7/166 | Qiradatan — reality or likeness | 2 | Meaning — no side taken |
| 31 | 7/169 | The distinction khalf / khalaf | a transmitted distinction, not certain | Language |
| 32 | 7/170 | Yumassikūna / yumsikūna | 2 | A variant reading |
| 33 | 7/172 | Alast — a real address, or a description of the fiṭra | 2 | Of kalām — no side taken |
| 34 | 7/175 | Who the man was | no name given | A report — not transmitted |
| 35 | 7/179 | Li-jahannama — the lām of outcome or of purpose | 2 | Of kalām — no side taken |
| 36 | 7/180 | Yulḥidūna / yalḥadūna | 2 | A variant reading |
| 37 | 7/187 | Thaqulat fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ | several explanations | Meaning |
| 38 | 7/190 | Who it is that associates partners | 3 (the third rests on a report, not transmitted) | Word order / report |
| 39 | 7/199 | Al-ʿafw — to pardon, or what is easy | 3 | Meaning |
| 40 | 7/201 | Ṭāʾif / ṭayf | 2 | A variant reading |
| 41 | 7/204 | The scope of the verse | no legal ruling issued | Legal |
| 42 | 7/206 | The question of the verses of prostration | no legal ruling issued | Legal |
| 43 | 7/206 | Who ʿinda rabbika are | the transmitted explanation conveyed, not named | A gap |
The count: in forty-three places no preference has been made. Seven of them fall directly within a field of kalām debate (7, 15, 16, 22, 26, 33, 35), seven are variant readings (10, 17, 19, 23, 32, 36, 40), three fall within the field of legal ruling (25, 41, 42); the rest are questions of word, of word order and of meaning.
A reading was recorded in the section on the structure of the sūra: the three cornerstones — 11-25 (Adam), 172-174 (alast), 175-177 (the man who slipped out of the signs) — are three moments of the same matter; in all three there is first a giving, and then the passing of what was given out of the hand.
Now, with the whole sūra treated, two things can be added to that reading, and both can be verified from the text:
One — the sūra tells of "what was given passing out of the hand" not only in the three cornerstones but in every block:
| Block | What was given | What happened |
|---|---|---|
| II (11-25) | A prohibition | It was broken — then confessed |
| III (26-36) | Clothing and adornment | Held forbidden, or the measure exceeded |
| V (54-58) | Rain and soil | Two soils, one water — the result diverged |
| VI (59-102) | Messengers and bounties | Wa in wajadnā aktharahum la-fāsiqīn (102) |
| VII (103-171) | Deliverance and a Book | The calf (148), the Sabbath (163), ʿaraḍa hādha'l-adnā (169) |
| VIII (172-186) | A testimony and signs | It was forgotten (172); it was slipped off (175) |
| IX (187-206) | A Book, names, commands | Wa lā takun mina'l-ghāfilīn (205) — as a prohibition |
| Verse | Command |
|---|---|
| 145 | Fa-khudhhā bi-quwwatin |
| 170 | Wa'lladhīna yumassikūna bi'l-kitāb |
| 171 | Khudhū mā ātaynākum bi-quwwatin |
| 199 | Khudhi'l-ʿafw |
| 205 | Wa'dhkur rabbaka fī nafsik |
I record this as my own reading and it is not binding; its ground is the two tables above. The sūra works one question through two hundred and six verses — what does man do with the knowledge given to him? — and gives its answer with a command: hold it in your hand.